FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT THE COLLEGE …

FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT

THE COLLEGE OF NEW JERSEY

2000 PENNINGTON ROAD

EWING, NJ 08628

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 2 OF 3

DIVISION 23

ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

January 15, 2018

Prepared by:

DLB Associates Consulting Engineers, P.C.

265 Industrial Way West

Eatontown, NJ 07724

(DLB # 47210)

TCNJ FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT dlb # 47210

ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION January 15, 2018



TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230100 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

230130 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PIPING

230518 ESCEUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

230523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC

230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230533 HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING

230548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230713 DUCT INSULATION

230716 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION

230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC

232113 HYDRONIC PIPING

232116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS

232213 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING AND VALVES

232216 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES

232223 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS

232513 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEM

233113 METAL DUCTS

233119 HVAC CASINGS

233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS

235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

237313 CUSTOM OUTDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS

238219 FAN COIL UNITS

238239 CABINET UNIT HEATERS



BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 1

SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 INTENT

A. These specifications shall be used by all Contractors and

Subcontractors for the construction of this project. This

section applies to all sections of Division 23 of this project,

except as specified otherwise in each individual section.

B. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and Project-

General Requirements are made part of Division 23, Mechanical

Work.

C. Continuous Occupancy: All buildings shall be considered

occupied during the life of this Contract, unless otherwise

indicated in construction documentation. When interference is

unavoidable, the Contractor shall:

1. Schedule work in advance with the Owner‘s representative.

2. Make temporary connections when required to maintain

uninterrupted electrical, plumbing, HVAC service, and

process utilities service.

3. Perform work as quietly as possible to avoid unnecessary

disturbance.

4. Proposed work methods, producing high noise levels, dust or

potential hazards to occupants, must be reviewed with

Owner‘s representative prior to commencement.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work to be provided under this specification includes, but

is not limited to: the furnishing, delivery, unloading,

handling, storing, protection, erecting, installing, adjusting,

testing, and cleaning of all equipment, materials, and

apparatus which are required, complete in all respects and




fully adjusted and capable of operating as shown on the

drawings and/or in the specifications.

B. Furnishing of Equipment and Materials

1. Owner Furnished and Contractor Installed (OFCI) Equipment

designated in each individual section, and/or identified on

the drawings, will be furnished by the Owner for

installation under Division 23 of the contract. Contractor

to inspect upon delivery, note any damages; any later

damages are responsibility of this Contractor. Mechanical

Contractor shall at proper time move, uncrate, set in

place, align, and/or make all necessary connections,

including the installation of subassemblies and/or

accessories provided with the equipment. Provide shut-off

valves, unions, traps, vibration isolators, etc., as

applicable, and/or as required, for this equipment (refer

to drawings for details). The manufacturer of equipment

purchased may vary slightly from that specified and/or

indicated, and therefore equipment may require some

rearranging from that indicated. Connections to such

rearranged equipment shall be made without additional cost

to the Owner.

2. Furnished and Installed by this Contractor: Miscellaneous

equipment is defined as all equipment furnished under this

section and/or other sections of this specification. See

each specific section, and/or drawings, for information

pertaining to connections to miscellaneous equipment.

1.4 RELATED WORK

A. All work required in the specifications listed below:

1. Project drawings.

2. All project specifications.

1.5 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work and equipment provided under this contract shall be

installed in strict accordance with all Federal, State, Local

Codes, Laws, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations of public

administrative authorities, including all health and safety

codes, environmental, and OSHA requirements. The Contractor

shall obtain approval of all systems before starting work.

B. In accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract, the

bidder shall inform the owner of all discrepancies that he




observes between the applicable codes and the specifications

and drawings. The bidder shall submit such data to the owner

in writing before the end of bidding period. The bidder shall

include in his bid price an allowance for the difference in

cost required to satisfy all code requirements.

C. All violations of Code Requirements not identified during the

bidding period shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost

to the owner.

D. References made herein, or in any of the Mechanical

Specifications listed above, to standards, codes,

specifications, or recommendations of various technical

societies, trade organizations, or governmental agencies are to

the edition in effect at the time of the proposal, including

all addenda.

E. Code changes: If code changes occurring between time of

proposal and date of permit issue, and the Contractor has

delayed in the acquisition of his permits, the Contractor shall

hold the owner free from additional expense resulting from such

code change.

F. Detailed listing of reference codes and standards:




REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS

American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA)

ABMA STD 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball

Bearings

ABMA STD 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller

Bearings

Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)

AFBMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

AFBMA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

American Gas Association (AGA)

AGA Z21.22 Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff

Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads

ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ANSI S1.1 Acoustical Terminology (Including Mechanical

Shock and Vibration)

ANSI S1.13 Methods for Measurement of Sound Pressure

Levels

ANSI S1.8 Preferred Reference Quantities for Acoustical

Levels

ANSI Z358.1 Emergency Eye Wash and Shower Equipment

Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)

ARI 1010 Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained

Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers

ARI 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment

ARI 410 Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating

Coils

ARI 430 Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Coils

ARI 575 Measuring Machinery Sound Within Equipment Rooms

ARI 610 Central system Humidifiers

ARI 620 Standard for Self-Contained Humidifiers




ARI 640 Standard for Commercial and Industrial Humidifiers

ARI Guideline D Application and Installation of Central

Station Air-Handling Units

ARI 850 Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment

Acoustical Society of America

ASA 16 (ANSI S1.36) Survey Methods for Determination of Sound

Power Levels of Noise Sources

ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4) Specification for Sound Level Meters

ASA 49 (ANSI S12.1) Preparation of Standard Procedures to

Determine the Noise Emission from Sources

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 33 Methods for Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooled and

Air Heating Coils

ASHRAE 52.1 Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices used in

General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter

ASHRAE 68 Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement

Procedure for Fans

ASHRAE 70 Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance

of Outlets and Inlets

ASHRAE Handbook Systems Volume, Chapter "Sound and Vibration

Control"

ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 8-D-Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification

Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers,

and Welding and Brazing Operators

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VII, Division 1

ASME A112.6.1 Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for

Public Use




ASME A112.18.1 Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixtures

Fittings

ASME A112.19.1 Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures

ASME A112.19.2 Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures

ASME A112.19.3 Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for

Residential Use)

ASME A112.19.5 Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals

ASME A112.21.1 Floor Drains

ASME A112.21.2 Roof Drains

ASME A112.26.1 Water Hammer Arrestors

ASME B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings

ASME B16.23 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings

- DWV

ASME B16.26 Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

ASME B16.29 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder

Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and

300

ASME B31.1 Code for Power Piping

ASME B31.5 Refrigeration Piping

ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping

ASME SEC IX Welding and Blazing Qualifications.

American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE)

ASSE 1011 Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers

ASSE 1012 Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent

ASSE 1013 Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle

ASSE 1019 Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-

Backflow Types

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A 36 Structural Steel




ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated,

Welded and Seamless

ASTM A 74 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM A 90 Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Iron or Steel Articles

ASTM A 105 Forging, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components

ASTM A 167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A 234 Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy

Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures

ASTM A 366 Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial

Quality

ASTM A 480 General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless

and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A 525 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 527 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip

Process, Lock Forming Quality

ASTM A 568 Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-

Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled

ASTM A 569 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled

Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality

ASTM B 32 Solder Metal

ASTM B 42 Seamless Copper Pipe

ASTM B 88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B 306 Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

ASTM C 14 Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe

ASTM C 177 Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate

Apparatus

ASTM C 240 Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block

ASTM C 443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert

Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets

ASTM C 478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

ASTM C 518 Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Method




ASTM C 533 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal

Insulation

ASTM C 534 Pre-formed Flexible Ellastomeric Cellular Thermal

Insulation in the Sheet and Tublar Form

ASTM C 547 Mineral Fiber Pre-formed Pipe Insulation

ASTM C 552 Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 564 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings

ASTM C 578 Pre-formed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation

ASTM C 591 Unfaced Pre-formed, Rigid Cellular Polyurethane

Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 592 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Commercial and Industrial Applications

ASTM C 610 Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal

Insulation

ASTM C 612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 795 Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with

Austenitic Stainless Steel

ASTM C 921 Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal

Insulation

ASTM D 1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded

Rubber

ASTM D 1667 Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride

Polymers and Copopolymers (Closed-Cell Foam)

ASTM D 1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D 2235 Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-

Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe

(SDR-Series)

ASTM D 2310 Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe

ASTM D 2466 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D 2467 Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D 2680 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly

(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite-Sewer Piping




ASTM D 2683 Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside

Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing

ASTM D 2751 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe

and Fittings

ASTM D 2842 Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics

ASTM D 2855 Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3309 Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Hot-and Cold-Water

Distribution Systems

ASTM E 477 Method of Testing Duct Liner Materials and

Prefabricated Silencers for Acoustical and Airflow Performance

ASTM E 596 Method of Laboratory Measurement of the Noise

Reduction of Sound Isolating Enclosures

ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials

ASTM E 90 Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne

Sound Transmission of Building Partitions

ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

ASTM F 477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic

Pipe

ASTM F 708 Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers

ASTM F 845 Plastic Insert Fittings for Polybutylene (PB)

Tubing

ASTM F 876 Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing

ASTM F 877 Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and

Cold-Water Distribution Systems

American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS)

AWS A5.8 Brazing Filler Metal

AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code

AWS D9.1 Welding of Sheet Metal

AWS D10.9 Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures

and Welders for Piping and Tubing

American Waterworks Association, Inc. (AWWA)

AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for

Water and Other Liquids




AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48

in., for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Grey-Iron

Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds

or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids

AWWA C506 Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure

Principle and Double Check Valve Types

AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains

Cast Iron Sanitary Pipe Institute (CISPI)

CISPI 301 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron

Sanitary Systems

CISPI 310 Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems

Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM)

FM 2-8N Installation of Sprinkler System

Institute of Environmental Sciences (IES)

IES-RP-CC-001 Recommended Practices

IES-RP-CC-001.3 Recommended Practices

Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry (MSS)

MSS SP-110 Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder

Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and

Manufacture

MSS SP-67 Butterfly Valves

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

MSS SP-70 Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-71 Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded

Ends

MSS SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

MSS SP-85 Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded

Ends




MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and

Installation Practices

National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)

NEBB Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound and Vibration

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA MG1 Motors and Generators

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 10 Portable Fire Extinguishers

NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems

NFPA 14 Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems

NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems

NFPA 22 Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection

NFPA 24 Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their

Appurtenances

NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems

NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems

NFPA 91 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust

and Vapor Removal or Conveying

NFPA 92A Smoke Control Systems

NFPA 96 Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and

Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment

NFPA 214 Water Cooling Towers

NFPA 231 General Storage

NFPA 231C Rack Storage Materials

NFPA 255 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

NFPA 318 Protection of Clean Rooms

National Insulation Standards (NAIMA)




National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)

PS 15 Voluntary Product Standard for Custom Contact-Molded

Reinforced-Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment

Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)

PDI G-101 Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors

with Appendix of Sizing and Installation Data.

PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arrestors

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,

Inc. (SMACNA)

SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards

SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible

SMACNA Metal Duct Construction Standards

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

UL Fire Resistance Directory

UL 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors

UL 33 Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service

UL 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper

Conductors

UL 555 Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers

UL 586 Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate Air

Filter Units

UL 555S Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems

UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UL 867 Electronic Air Cleaners

UL 900 Test Performance of Air Filter Units

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Architect/Engineers Drawings: The Contractor shall be guided

in his work by all architectural, structural, mechanical, HVAC,

electrical, plumbing, and fire protection drawings and

specifications issued by the owner for this project.




1. All drawings are part of the Contract, and drawings and

specifications shall be considered as complementary so that

anything shown upon one, or described by the other, or

fairly implied by either or both, shall be done and

performed the same as if shown upon and described by both.

2. Contract drawings for mechanical work are in part

diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and

indicate general arrangement of equipment, ducts, conduits,

piping, and approximate sizes and locations of equipment

and outlets. Mechanical trades shall follow these drawings

in laying out their work, consult general construction

drawings to familiarize themselves with all conditions

affecting their work, and shall verify spaces in which

their work will be installed. Coordinate work with other

trades as job conditions reasonably require.

3. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in

indicated locations and arrangement, make such changes

without extra cost to Owner, but DO NOT proceed without

informing and getting concurrence from the owner.

4. The drawings are not intended to be scaled for roughing in

measurements nor as shop drawings.

5. The installation details, instructions, and recommendations

of the manufacturer of the product used, modified to obtain

the best end result, shall form the basis of attending

installation of the products for usage on this project

except where definite and specific instructions are set

forth therein or details are shown on plans.

B. Ordinances, Permits, and Codes:

1. All work shall be executed in accordance with the local,

State, and/or other attending rules and regulations

applicable to the trade affected and be subject to the

inspection of these departments.

2. Obtain all permits and licenses required for work performed

under Division 23 and pay all fees in connection with same.

Turn over all documents to the Owner‘s representative.

3. After entering into contract, this Contractor shall be

responsible to complete all work necessary to comply with

such governing codes, regulations, and ordinances without

extra charge to the owner.

C. Certification and Qualification

1. Contractor, Subcontractor, Vendor, and Manufacturer shall

provide proof of certification to applicable standards as

called for in this and each section of the specifications

upon request by the owner. All costs associated with the




failure to provide requested certification shall be

included at no additional cost to the owner.

2. The Contractor shall certify compliance with the submittal

requirements of section 1.6 of this specification.

3. The Contractor shall certify their capabilities and

experience shall be in an area of trade of the required for

this project and this Contract.

4. All Contractors and Suppliers shall be qualified to comply

with all requirements of this work that are applicable,

unless otherwise acceptable to the owner.

5. All work performed by qualified Contractors and Equipment

Suppliers shall be in accordance with the approved

instructions and procedures of manufacturers of equipment

and materials provided.

6. The owner or its representative shall maintain the right of

access to the Equipment Supplier's records and/or

facilities for the reason of auditing for compliance to

quality system requirements.

7. The Contractor and Supplier shall submit an uncontrolled

copy of his Quality Assurance/Control Manual or program

description. The Quality Assurance Manual or other written

program description shall provide for implementation of the

requirements listed in these specifications. When an

evaluation by the owner determines that his Quality

Assurance/Control program does not need to address all of

the Quality Program Requirements listed, exception may be

taken by submitting a brief statement of justification for

each requirement considered not applicable. The owner has

the sole right to accept or reject any exceptions

recommended by the Contractor or Supplier.

8. Suppliers of equipment shall impose quality requirements of

this specification on lower tier suppliers consistent with

the importance and complexity of the product being supplied

by the lower tier supplier's quality related operations

consistent with the nature and scope of the work or service

provided by the lower tier supplier. The Contractor,

Suppliers, and their subtier suppliers are subject to

inspection of material and records by the owner prior to

shipment, to verify adequate implementation and compliance.

9. Contractors shall give five (5) working days’ notice of the

shipment to the owner prior to shipment. Acceptance of

material and workmanship by the ownerM shall be dependent

upon acceptable site inspection.

10. Quality related documentation and records shall be in

accordance with the requirements of submittal section. All

certified reports and required documentation shall be

legible and reproducible.




1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit for review and approval manufacturer's material and

equipment data and shop drawings giving full information as to

dimensions, weight, materials, wiring diagrams, performance

data, etc., covering the complete range of operating conditions

and all information pertinent to the adequacy of the equipment.

B. Contractor's Drawings: The Contractor shall prepare any

supplementary (shop) drawings required for clarifying details

regarding shop fabrications or field installation.

1. Shop drawings for installation shall be required even where

Contract Documents suffice.

2. Approval of the Contractor's shop, field or equipment

drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from

responsibilities due to errors, omissions or deviations

from plans and specifications unless the Contractor

notified the owner of such deviations, in writing, at the

time of submittal.

3. The owner may request additional installation details or

shop drawings of systems which are complex or which require

close coordination with other related work specifications.

4. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall include floor plans,

sectional views, wiring diagrams, and installation details

of equipment; and equipment spaces identifying and

indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement of

items of equipment, control panels, accessories, piping,

duct work, and other items that must be shown to assure a

coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify

circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each

item of equipment and the interconnection between each item

of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance

for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating

equipment devices. The Contractor shall verify actual

conditions in the field and shall take all necessary

measurements for the proper installation of the work as

shown on shop drawings or otherwise required.

5. Shop drawings, product data and/or samples shall be

submitted for all equipment specified or scheduled. Shop

drawings and product data and samples submittals shall

comply with individual applicable specification section

requirements.

6. Approval by the owner indicates general conformance to

contract documents (not performance, code compliance,

dimensional requirements or quantities) and does not

constitute approval to vary from contract documents.

Resubmit disapproved shop drawings, product data and




samples or other required submittals for review and

approval in the same manner as for first submittal.

7. No portion of the work requiring shop drawings, product

data or sample approval shall be started until owner

approval is obtained in writing. Work done prior to

receipt of approval shall be replaced as required at no

additional cost to the owner.

C. Materials lists, certifications, test records/data, etc. shall

be submitted as required by individual applicable sections of

Division 23 where indicated under "Submittals." Contractor

shall be responsible for measures for identification and

control of materials, parts, and components which include

Traceability of items as required by codes, standards, or

specification, to the associated documentation, such as

drawings to specifications, to Purchase Orders, manufacturing

and inspection documents, to deviation reports, to non-

conformance reports.

D. Equipment and Materials

1. Specification of equipment and materials by brand name is

intended to establish a standard of quality.

2. Substitutions for items described in the contract documents

where an "approved equal" is included for an item shall be

allowed only if written approval by the owner is obtained

seven days after award. Proposed substitutions shall be:

a. Provided with certified data where required in the

contract documents.

b. Available in quantity sufficient to prevent delay of

the work.

c. Meets or exceeds the requirements of the contract

document listed item features, performance

requirements, dimensional limitations, functions,

types, materials, and capacity as the specified

product.

d. Equal to contract document specified item in strength,

durability, efficiency, serviceability,

maintainability, energy efficiency, and life

expectancy.

e. Compatible with the design without additional cost to

the project.

3. Contractor shall specify the manufacturer for each item

with the bid documents.




E. Submit records of field or factory testing and balancing of

equipment or installations on reproducible sheets for approval

and include copy in the Instruction and Maintenance Manuals or

shipping papers for factory tested equipment. The format of

the record sheet shall be approved by the onwer prior to actual

testing of equipment and balancing the system.

F. Coordination

1. Site Visit: The Contractor shall visit the site, verify

all existing conditions, dimensions and locations whether

shown on the drawings or not, and examine all adjoining

areas for existing conditions, which may affect his

performance on the contract. See Section 1.1.

2. Availability of Documents: Complete drawings and

specifications of all trades are available for this

Contractor's use for this project, and may be obtained from

the owner. The Contractor shall carefully review these

drawings and specifications before installing any of this

work and shall cooperate with other contractors and Owner‘s

representatives so that the best arrangements and

installation of all work can be obtained. The Contractor

shall notify the Owner‘s representative of any points of

conflict between his work and that of the other trades, so

that the conflict may be resolved prior to the start of

work. Work installed by this Contractor, which interferes

with the work of other trades, as shown on drawings and/or

specifications, shall be removed and reinstalled at this

Contractor's expense, when so directed by Owner‘s

representative.

3. Drawings and Specifications: The drawings and

specifications are complementary and the requirement of one

shall be as binding as if required by both. In case of

conflict between drawings and specifications, the more

stringent requirement will be applied or the Owner‘s

representative shall decide as to which shall govern.

4. Project Record Documents: One full set of design drawings

and specifications, change orders and other modifications,

shall be maintained at construction site in good order.

This set shall be marked in red ink, on a continuous basis,

to record all changes made during construction. The

location and invert elevation of piping or other work that

is buried shall be located by exact dimension, from

building walls, before trenches are backfilled.

5. As-built Drawings: At the completion of job, and at the

time of final acceptance, the contractor shall turn over

complete set of PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS to this Owner‘s

representative.




1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protective Covering for Equipment

1. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment provided

under Division 23 and/or equipment furnished by Owner for

installation under Division 23 to protect from mortar,

paint, debris, etc., during construction. A fire-retardant

polyethylene covering tied securely around the equipment

will be acceptable for this purpose.

B. Cleaning and Painting

1. Clean away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting

from Mechanical Contractor's work and/or operations,

leaving the job and equipment in a clean condition. All

existing areas in which work is performed shall be cleaned

and restored to their original condition upon completion of

the project.

2. Air surfaces of all coils, fans, air units, air filters,

etc., shall be wiped clean and/or washed if required. All

plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned of all

foreign matter, including stickers. Clean all items

furnished such as floor drains, pumps, motors, condensers,

traps, etc., leaving the entire installation in a first-

class condition.

3. Equipment and/or materials provided under Division 23 will

be painted by the General Contractor except where specified

otherwise. However, any mechanical equipment which has

sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish

coats of paint shall be restored to the original condition

and appearance by this Contractor prior to application of

finish paint.

C. General

1. Deliver joint-sealer materials in original unopened

containers or bundles with labels informing about

manufacturer, product name and designation, color,

inspection period for use, life, coring time, and mixing

instructions for multicomponent materials.

2. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with

the manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their

deterioration and damage.

3. Provide factory-applied plastic end caps on each length of

pipe and tube, except for concrete, corrugated metal, hub-

and-spigot, and clay pipe. Maintain end caps through




shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage

and entrance of direct debris and moisture.

4. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and

enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored

inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.

Store all piping and tubing to prevent sagging and bending.

5. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture

and dirt by inside storage and enclosure or by packaging

with durable waterproof wrapping.

6. Protect valves against damage to threads, flange faces, and

weld end preps. Ensure valves are dry, remain dry, and are

protected against rust and corrosion. Protect valves from

weather. Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or

rigging joints.

7. Deliver all material to site in original shipping

containers with manufacture's stamp or label showing fire

hazard indexes of products where applicable. Store

products at places recommended by manufacturer to prevent

damage. Do not stack or store containers to cause damage

to products.

8. Do not install damaged equipment. Replace and return

damaged equipment to the manufacturer.

9. Handle all equipment carefully to prevent damage:

breaking, denting, scoring. Do not install damaged

equipment or components; replace with new. Store equipment

in a clean/dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,

water, construction debris, and physical damage. Comply

with manufacturer's instructions for rigging,

loading/unloading, moving, and installing them to final

location.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Equipment

1. Where equipment manufacturers are not named and performance

requirements are outlined, it shall be the equipment

manufacturer's responsibility to demonstrate by test that

performance criteria has been met. The Owner or

Architect/Engineer shall be the sole judge as to what tests

will be performed and he shall judge acceptability of

equipment. All tests requested shall be furnished without

additional cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer.

Factory tests may be required.

2. No changes in design or architecture of mechanical systems

shall be permitted to accommodate equipment unless required




design layout has been submitted and approved prior to bid

openings.

B. Job Conditions

1. Examine conditions of foundations and surfaces to support

pipe and equipment.

2. Examine details of building construction in order to

install the system to clear all structural work and finish.

3. Check surrounding territory and means of approach to site.

4. Check conditions at the actual job site and determine

facilities for delivery, storing, placing, handling, and

removal of materials and equipment and any and all

difficulties that may be encountered in the complete

execution of all work in accord with the contract

documents.

5. Verify all measurements and details on construction on job.

6. This Contractor is required to work out all coordination

problems. Coordination drawings shall be prepared by this

Contractor as required or requested by Owner or

Architect/Engineer for approval.

7. Check entire system in those areas which are part of this

project or related to work in this project to become

familiar with exact work that must be done on such system

and problems that will be encountered in executing such

work.

C. Accuracy of Data

1. The data noted on the drawings and contained in the

specifications relative to actual job measurements,

location of utilities, etc., are as accurate as can be

established; however, extreme accuracy is not guaranteed.

2. Final establishment of all data shall be determined on the

site, as job conditions demand, and subject to the approval

of the Architect/Engineer or Owner.

D. Measurements

1. Contractor shall check all measurements at building and

adjust work to fit into spaces allotted for same.

2. Close cooperation between all trades will be required

throughout the work to prevent interference in their

respective installations.

3. Any work installed without regard for work of other trades

which must, in the opinion of the Owner or

Architect/Engineer, necessarily be moved in order to permit




proper installation, shall be moved as a part of work

without extra charge.

4. Drawings show approximate locations of equipment, etc.

Exact dimensions and locations must be verified at the

site. Scaling or measurements from drawings shall be used

only for approximate locations.

5. In case of discrepancies, notify the Architect/Engineer or

Owner immediately, in writing, and await his decision

before proceeding.

6. Contractor is solely responsible for the accuracy of such

measurements taken and the laying out of the work.

7. Examine architectural and mechanical drawings and note

carefully the location of all equipment, piping, sleeves,

anchorages, etc., installed by others.

8. Contractor shall make good any errors or defects in his

work due to measurements taken or failure to report

discrepancies.

9. It shall be the duty of this Contractor to report any

interferences between his work and that of any other

Contractor to the Architect/Engineer or Owner as soon as

they are discovered. The Architect/Engineer or Owner will

determine which equipment shall be relocated, regardless of

which was first installed, and his decision shall be final.

Where job conditions require reasonable changes in

indicated locations and arrangements, such changes shall be

made without extra cost to the Owner.

E. Equipment and Material Removal, Relocation, and Patching:

Removal or relocation of existing equipment, ducts, and grilles

of any nature whatsoever as required to complete this

installation shall be provided including patching necessitated

due to the removal or relocation of existing equipment, ducts,

and grilles.

F. Remodeling

1. Relocation of existing equipment and/or piping systems,

which of necessity must provide continuous uninterrupted

service, shall be accomplished in the least possible time.

Work shall be scheduled so as to minimize downtime for the

respective systems involved. This will require, for

existing services being revamped and/or relocated, that all

interconnecting portions of these systems shall be

installed as complete as practicable prior to actual

shutdown for final connections.

2. Locate existing piping and make connection where required

and/or where shown on the drawings. Do not cut into

existing services without first ascertaining to the




satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer that the pipe

involved is the desired service. In any area where work

performed under Division 23 is the only work involved, cut,

patch, and restore the area to its original condition upon

completion of work.

3. All existing services and equipment shall be maintained

unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

4. Work that interrupts any service (this includes cutting

into existing lines for new connection) shall be performed

so as to cause the least interference to the normal

operation of the building. Anticipate scheduling work at

periods which will not result in additional construction

cost.

5. The Owner shall be informed 2 weeks in advance of any

shutoff which will occur and which will be affected for a

specific period of time. Only after the Owner is fully

informed and has agreed to the schedule of shutoffs, can

the work proceed accordingly.

6. All diffusers, coils, valves, thermostats, fixtures,

piping, and other valuable equipment shall remain property

of the Owner, except where noted otherwise, and shall be

stored on the site where directed.

1.10 GUARANTEE

A. This Contractor guarantees, by his acceptance of the contract,

that all work installed will be free from any and all defects

in workmanship and/or materials; that all apparatus will

develop capacities and characteristics specified; and that if,

during the period of 2 years or as otherwise specified from the

date of the Certificate of Completion and acceptance of work

and payment, any such defects in workmanship, material, and/or

performance appear, the Contractor will, without cost to the

Owner, remedy such defects within a reasonable time, to be

specified in notice by the Owner; in default thereof, the Owner

may have such work done and charge cost to this Contractor.

1.11 WORK OF OTHER TRADES

A. This Contractor is required to provide a 100% complete and

satisfactory installation of a heating, ventilating, and air

conditioning system and mechanical systems, equipment, and

materials shown on drawings. It is his responsibility to see

that the work essential to the operation of this system, but

performed by other trades, is provided on schedule and in




accordance with the requirements as set forth in this

specification.

B. The General Contractor, or this Contractor in the absence of

the General Contractor, shall provide the following work under

the direction of this Contractor, who is responsible for

setting sleeves for pipe and duct openings and also for size

and location of all openings. This Contractor shall provide

his own cutting, and in the absence of the General Contractor

shall:

1. Patch all openings for ductwork and piping.

2. Patch all openings for louvers.

3. Set lintels for louvers and duct openings.

4. Furnish and install door grilles, if used.

5. Set louvers in outside walls.

6. Install building-access panels.

7. Paint duct, grilles, pipes, etc.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Furnish an operation and maintenance manual for each item of

equipment. Furnish three copies of the manual bound in

hardback binders, or an approved equivalent. Furnish one

complete manual prior to the time that equipment tests are

performed, and furnish the remaining manuals before the

contract is completed.

B. The manual shall include the names, addresses, and telephone

numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment, and of the

local representatives for each item of equipment.

C. The manual shall include: wiring and control diagrams, with

data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of

equipment; a control sequence describing start-up, operation

and shutdown; description of the function of each principal

item of equipment; the procedure for starting; the procedure

for operating; shut-down instructions; installation

instructions; maintenance instructions; lubrication schedule

including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency;

performance data, and parts list. The parts lists for

equipment shall indicate the sources of supply, recommended

spare parts, and the local service organization.




1.13 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submit operating instructions for approval by the owner for

each principal item of equipment, for the use of the operation

and maintenance personnel, when so specified in appropriate

section.

B. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams,

control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal item

of equipment.

C. Operating instructions shall be printed or engraved, and shall

be framed under glass or in approved laminated plastic, and

posted where directed by Owner‘s Representative. Operating

instructions exposed to the weather shall be made of weather-

resisting materials, or shall be suitably enclosed to be

weather protected. Operating instructions shall not fade when

exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy

removal or peeling.

D. Operating instructions shall be attached to or posted adjacent

to each principal item of equipment, including start-up, proper

adjustment, operating, lubrication, shut-down, safety

precautions, procedure in the event of equipment failure, and

other item of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of

each items of equipment.

1.14 1.13 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. When specified in other sections, the Contractor shall furnish

the services of competent instructors who will give full

instructions to the designated personnel in the adjustment,

operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety

requirements of the equipment or system specified. Instruction

shall be given during the first regular work week, after the

equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the

owner for regular operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All material and equipment shall be new and shall show evidence

of approval by applicable testing agency, such as, UL, ASTM,

etc. Material and equipment of similar usage shall be of same

manufacturer.




2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment shall not be installed directly on floors, walls or

roofs, but shall be installed on suitable pads and/or

platforms. Where such platforms are not shown on drawings, the

Contractor shall design and construct supporting structures and

attachments to safely withstand loads and stresses to which

they may be subjected.

B. Submit for review, layout drawings and calculations of supports

and attachments for mechanical systems including fans, ducts,

pipes, field erected fan units and plenums.

C. Roof Top Platforms: Construct of structural steel members

conforming to owner’s roof standards.

D. Concrete Pads: Provide not less than 4" high and projecting

minimum 3" on all sides, beyond equipment for floor mounted

equipment, unless otherwise specified. Anchor bolts shall be

placed in steel pipe sleeves, with a plate at bottom end of

sleeves to hold bolt.

E. Floor Mounted Stands: Construct with structural steel members

of steel pipe and fasten with flanges bolted to floor.

F. Curbs: Construct concrete curbs 4" high and 6" wide unless

otherwise indicated. Acoustical plenum curbs shall be sealed

air and water tight for conditions of operating pressure.

G. Ceiling Suspended Platforms: Construct with steel hangers

brace and fasten to building structure.

H. Wall Mounted Platforms: Construct with steel brackets.

I. Saddles for Tank Supports: Cast iron or welded steel of

curvature to fit tank. Locate supports to avoid undue strain

on shell, and interference with pipe connections to tank

outlets.

2.3 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. Used Equipment and Materials: All used equipment and materials

furnished by the owner shall be cleaned and tested by this

contractor prior to installation. All defects shall be

promptly reported to Owner‘s representatives.

B. New Equipment and Materials: All new equipment and materials

furnished by the owner will be consigned to the Contractor.




The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, inspecting,

storage, and handling of these items, in addition to

installation.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide access doors that are indicated or required, for access

to concealed mechanical, electrical devices, and fire dampers,

which may require future inspection, repair or adjustment; and

where required by applicable codes.

B. In suspended metal pan, lay-in panel, and accessible tile

ceilings, use ceiling element as access panel.

C. Attach a one-inch diameter aluminum tag, with plain stamped

numerals, to ceiling elements used as access doors and recessed

pan doors.

D. Doors in walls, or ceilings of two hour fire resistive

construction, as in stairwells, pipe or duct shafts, shall bear

Underwriters Laboratory "B" label.

E. Access doors shall be MILCOR, ZURN, WALSH or APPROVED EQUAL.

2.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical components of mechanical equipment and systems such

as motors, starters, and controls, shall be provided under this

Division and shall be as specified herein, and as necessary,

for complete and operable systems. Interconnecting wiring for

components of packaged equipment shall be provided as an

integral part of the equipment. All interconnecting power

wiring and conduit for field erected equipment, and all control

wiring rated over 100 volts, and conduit, shall be as specified

in Division 26. Control wiring rated under 100 volts, and

conduit, shall be as specified in appropriate sections of

Division 23.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Equipment Identification: All mechanical equipment such as

fans, pumps, heat-exchangers, control panels, etc., shall be

identified with hard plastic baklite nameplate, with white

etched letters on background, to identify number and function

of equipment. All nameplates will be secured with screws.

Adhesives and tapes will not be acceptable.




B. Accessory Identification: Miscellaneous accessories such as

switches, gauges, dampers, thermostats, etc., shall be

identified with plastic embossed tape.

C. Valve Identification: The valve identification shall be

stamped on one-inch round brass plate and installed to valve

stem with brass chain, to match P & ID drawing numbers.

D. Pipe Identification: Pipe coding shall consist of color coded

identification bands. On long straight runs apply the bands at

maximum 20-foot intervals. On short runs and complicated

piping, apply as often as necessary for proper identification,

but not exceeding 10 feet apart. Coding shall be applied to

all piping in mechanical rooms, accessible chases and other

accessible area. Place additional bands on concealed piping

near access door. Identification bands shall be placed on the

bottom half of the pipe, facing about 30 degrees downward

toward either side. Where the view from this angle on the

floor is obscured by other pipe or objects, place the bands in

the most visible position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE

A. All non-hazardous material and equipment specified to be

removed, and not installed, shall be recycled when possible or

properly disposed of unless directed otherwise by Owner‘s

representative. Agreement of the proper disposal method shall

be agreed to prior to submitting the bid.

B. Any work which generates dust (such as sanding, jackhammering,

excavating, etc.) shall be done in such a manner that all

personnel and equipment in the vicinity are protected. Such

work may require ventilated visqueen enclosures. Of particular

concern is high voltage equipment; however, no dust generation

without suitable abatement is acceptable.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, removal of pipes, ducts, and

equipment, includes removal of accessories such as hangers, air

outlets, piping connections, junction boxes, starters.

Connections to mechanical equipment required to be removed or

disconnected shall be removed to source, or if concealed, to

point of concealment. Terminate connections behind finished

surfaces and, if subject to movement, clear of building

construction. Cap connections extending from ducts or piping

remaining in service.




D. If disposal directions are not received by the Contractor, it

shall be understood that he will be responsible for

transferring the removed material from the building, and

disposing of it in an acceptable manner. All materials and

equipment designated to be removed and reused, will be

inspected by the Owner‘s representative, and shall be cleaned

and tested by the Contractor before being reinstalled.

E. The Contractor shall prepare equipment to be stored by the

owner as follows (equipment to be weather-protected):

1. Fan inlets and outlets shall be covered to keep out water

and dirt; pipe openings shall be capped; exposed metal

parts shall be coated to prevent rusting, and finned coils

shall be covered with plywood to keep their fins from being

bent. Equipment nameplate data shall be recorded and this

data shall be given to Owner‘s representative.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with

manufacturers' published recommendations.

3.3 EQUIPMENT ACCESS

A. All mechanical and electrical equipment, valves, controls and

accessories, etc. shall be located within arm's reach (from the

floor or platform) to provide for easy access for operating,

repair and maintenance. Instruments such as gauges and

thermometers shall be at eye level when feasible. If it is not

feasible to provide easy access and visibility, the contractor

shall provide an alternate means to maintain, view or adjust

the device. If the device is concealed, furnish and install

access doors.

3.4 BUILDING STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

A. Work involving building structural members, shall be performed

only after obtaining prior written approval of the building

architect.

B. Drilling, torch cutting, or welding of steel columns, trusses,

or any structural member is not allowed. Various straps, band,

clamps, or adhesives shall be used to attach components.




C. Corrugated steel decking shall not be penetrated from the lower

side to attach hanger rods for ducts, pipes, conduit, or

equipment. Unistrut will fit between the deck and trusses, or

structural members, and shall be installed to span existing

structures.

D. Buildings with structural concrete may be core drilled with

proper approval from the building architect, who will mark the

exact location where the hole is to be drilled. Use existing

holes, if at all possible, even if it means a longer pipe or

conduit run.

E. Excavation of earth adjacent to, or within 45 degree angle of

repose of the bearing soil, shall not be made.

3.5 BUILDING ROOF INTEGRITY

A. All work involving building roof, including roof penetrations,

equipment-platforms, pitch pockets, etc., shall be in strict

accordance to the owner’s roof standards, the owner’s

Architectural Standards, and the owner’s Safety requirements

(certain signs and guardrails are required). All deviations,

exceptions and modifications shall have prior written approval

of building architect.

3.6 UTILITY CONNECTIONS

A. Utility interruptions for new branches shall be planned with

Owner‘s representative, at least two weeks ahead of time. The

Contractor shall make an allowance in his bid to perform a

majority of utility connection work on premium time during off

hours. Existing utilities can be turned off only by the

owner’s Maintenance Department. Contractor personnel are

prohibited from repositionng any existing valves, or switching

of existing equipment.

3.7 CLEANROOM / COMPUTER ROOM WORK

A. All contractor personnel working inside existing computer rooms

shall observe all owner’s procedures, and isolating area of

work by hanging visqueen.




3.8 PENETRATIONS, SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS

A. This Contractor shall be responsible for installation of metal

sleeves, pipes, cans and equipment, required for the mechanical

installation as shown on the drawings. These shall be located

as per instruction from the building architect. Penetration

through existing floors, etc., shall be core drilled to suit.

Provide escutcheons for pipes at walls, floors and ceilings, as

directed by Owner‘s representative.

3.9 INSULATING COUPLINGS (DIELECTRIC UNIONS or DIELECTRIC

WATERWAYS)

A. Furnish at all interconnections, between piping systems of

dissimilar materials, and at all connections of piping systems

to equipment, where piping and equipment area of dissimilar

materials the appropriate sizes of insulating couplings.

Couplings shall be EPCO manufactured, by EPCO Sales Company,

Cleveland, Ohio, or approved equal; specifically designed for

the purpose of electrically isolating pipe lines from other

piping systems of equipment.

3.10 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly

stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and

during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations; and as approved by the Owner‘s representative.

Damaged or defective items shall be replaced at no cost to the

owner.

3.11 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews,

keys, and other rotating parts, located so that any person can

come in close proximity thereto, shall be fully enclosed or

properly guarded. High-temperature equipment and piping so

located as to endanger personnel, or create a fire hazard,

shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type

as specified herein. Items such as catwalks, ladders, and

guardrails shall be provided where required for safe operation

and maintenance of equipment. Avoid locating water piping,

valves, strainers, etc., near high voltage (600 volts or

higher) electrical equipment. Notify the owner immediately if

drawings show water piping within 20' of any such electrical

equipment.




B. All safety requirements (guarding, fall protection, ladders,

etc.) shall be utilized and maintained in a manner compliant

with local, state, and federal regulations and codes.

3.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The Contractor shall do all cutting of nonstructural parts of

buildings and structures, for the installation of his work, and

shall replace, fill in and patch to match, existing around such

openings; employing craftsmen skilled and regularly employed in

the respective crafts involved. Lintels, frames or

reinforcement for all openings shall be provided by the

Contractor.

3.13 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. This Contractor shall do all excavation necessary for the

installation of his work. Contractor shall obtain the best

information available from the Owner‘s representative, in

regards to existing underground utilities, prior to excavating.

Completed survey for underground utilities is the

responsibility of the contractor before excavation can begin.

Testing of soil for asbestos contents is required. Do not

start excavation until approval has been obtained by the owner.

Excavations will be done in strict accordance with applicable

safety laws and regulations. Prior to excavating, an

underground locator shall survey and mark the utilities.

B. Underground valves, meters, gages, etc. shall be installed in

watertight cristy boxes with removable cover level with ground.

All valves, cleanouts, etc. located under high traffic flow

areas shall be installed inside a protective valve box,

ironsides or approved equal.

C. The installation shall be inspected and approved before

backfilling.

D. Backfill shall be sand, wet tamped in 6" layers. The finished

surface shall match existing construction. Repair of asphalt

concrete surface shall be hot patched. Cold patch shall be

used for temporary purposes only. The final compaction shall

be 95% unless directed otherwise.

E. The Contractor, when trenching through a concrete slab such as

a sidewalk or trench, shall completely remove the entire slab,

expansion joint to expression. Such slabs will be replaced




with a steel reinforced slab, as per the owner’s Architectural

Specifications.

F. Alternate protected walkways shall be provided during sidewalk

work. Approval will be needed from the New Jersey State

Department of Community Affairs if egress is affected.

3.14 SHORING AND SUPPORT

A. The Contractor shall provide all permanent and temporary

shoring, anchoring, and bracing required to make all parts

absolutely stable and rigid; even when such shoring anchoring

and bracing are not explicitly called for.

B. The Contractor shall adequately support all free standing

enclosures, and equipment. This shall include, bolting to the

floor solid structural steel and permanent handrails, to

prevent tipping. Under no conditions shall equipment be

fastened to non-rigid building steel (i.e., removable platform

steel gratings, handrails, etc.).

3.15 ASBESTOS CONTROL

A. Asbestos or any product containing asbestos shall not be used

in any phase of construction. If, during construction, any

existing asbestos is encountered, the Owner‘s representative

shall be notified and the work shall not restart without the

owner’s approval.

3.16 CLEANUP

A. All exposed materials shall be thoroughly cleaned. No dirt,

debris, or liquid shall be permitted in the mechanical

equipment during progress of the work; and the Contractor shall

clean all pipes, ducts and equipment, prior to, as well as

after installation.

B. All debris shall be placed in containers, outside the building,

at the end of each working day. The containers, in turn, shall

be removed from the project site as soon as they are filled up.

3.17 PAINTING

A. All prefinished equipment and accessories, marred during

shipment or installation, shall be touched up. All mechanical




items exposed in occupied rooms, corridors, etc., shall be

painted per Architectural Specifications.

B. The Contractor shall provide the painting of the items listed

below:

1. All non-galvanized steel brackets, supports, bases, frames,

etc., used in the mechanical installation, including pipe

hangers and exposed piping.

2. If above listed items cannot be fully covered with paint

after installation, they shall be painted before they are

installed and touched up with paint after installation if

finish was damaged during installation.

3. All items to be painted shall be prepared to receive paint

per the mechanical equipment or material manufacturer's

application instructions.

C. Refer to specific job requirements in accordance with

Manufacturer's instruction for all the finishing work. Repair

all marred or damaged factory painted finishes with materials

and procedures to match original factory finish.

D. Identification: Provide schedules for stenciling and

identification markings. Submit stenciling and identification

marking for approval.

3.18 PROVISIONS FOR INSTALLATION

A. Where any work cannot be installed as the construction is

progressing, provide for boxes, sleeves, inserts, fixtures or

devices as necessary to permit installation of the omitted work

during later phases of construction. Arrange for chases, holes

and other openings in masonry, concrete or other work and

provide for subsequent closure of any openings required for

placing equipment. In general, use provisions for installation

that have been blocked out and structurally framed through

walls, floor, and roof.

3.19 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT

A. Take necessary measures to insure adequate protection of all

equipment and materials during delivery, storage, installation

and shutdown conditions. This responsibility shall include

provisions required to meet the conditions incidental to the

delays pending final test of systems and equipment under

seasonal conditions.




B. Operate the completed systems for a period of time prescribed

by the owner to determine the capability of the equipment and

controls to conform to the requirements of the drawings and

specifications.

C. Maintain all equipment and systems installed until final

acceptance by the owner.

3.20 OUTSIDE SERVICES

A. Connection Points: Underground and overhead utility services

shall be provided to utility and service line connection

points.

B. Contract Limits: Where "limits of contracts" designations are

indicated on site plans, they shall not apply to utility

service underground or overhead work necessary to serve the

project, and occurring outside of the "limits of contracts"

designations.

3.21 CLEANING

A. Contractor shall thoroughly clean all apparatus before placing

it in operation, restore finished surfaces, if damaged, and

deliver the entire installation in an approved condition.

3.22 START-UP/COMMISSIONING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for start-up and operation

of all systems during testing and balancing until such time as

systems have been accepted by the owner. Refer to specific

project requirements for the start-up procedures.

B. Where commissioning is specified, such commissioning shall be

performed by a third party contractor who will validate full

functionality of all individual components and system

functionality.

3.23 FIRESTOPPING

A. Unused slots, sleeves, and other penetrations in floors, walls

or other general construction shall be closed and sealed with

an approved firestopping material.




B. Firestopping material shall be UL listed and tested silicone

elastomer specifically formulated for use in horizontal and

vertical applications. The material shall possess intumescent

characteristics. Upon exposure to heat above 200 degrees F, it

shall expand to no less than 5 times its original volume to

form a fireproof envelope, UL rated for 2 and 3 hour

protection, when applied in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendation.

C. Floor slots and openings shall be closed with 16 gage

galvanized steel sheet supported on 1 inch by 1 inch by 1/8

inch structural angle, drilled or supported with power driven

studs into the building structure. Firestop with a layer of

silicone elastomer no less than 1 inch thick which completely

fills the opening. The top surface of the silicone elastomer

shall be approximately 1 inch below the finished floor slab.

D. Openings in walls shall be closed with 16 gage galvanized steel

sheet securely attached at the midpoint of the wall thickness

and firestopped on both sides of the steel sheet with no less

than 1/8 inch thick layer of non-sagging silicone elastomer to

fully cover the opening.

E. Single or multiple pipes passing through walls and floors shall

have the annular space between pipes or between pipes and

structure filled with silicone elastomer to provide a 3 hour

rated firestop for floors and walls.

F. The annulus between exposed pipe and ductwork and walls or

floors in finished spaces shall be filled, sealed, and painted

to match adjacent surfaces.

G. Identify unused sleeves and slots for future use by permanently

anchored brass nameplates identifying size and purpose of the

covered slot.

3.24 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of the

representatives of all required suppliers and subcontractors

required in the specifications to instruct the owner’s

maintenance and operating personnel. This period shall follow

the final inspection date or when directed by the owner.

Provide the services of a competent supervisor or technician to

instruct owner’s operating personnel in the operation of each

type of system. Include not less than eight full normal

working days in operation of the entire building system. Where




required by the individual mechanical section of these

specifications, provide the services of factory trained

specialist to instruct owner’s personnel in operation of

Special Systems. Include a minimum time for instructions as

required under that specification.

B. The above instruction period does not include the special

instruction periods specified hereinafter.

C. Compile and submit to the owner three (3) bound Instruction

Manuals. Provide the Instruction Manuals with an index sheet

listing the contents in alphabetical order together with

reference pages, containing the material listed below:

1. Operation instructions for each system including step-by-

step preparation for starting, summer operation, winter

operation, shutdown and draining.

2. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of

equipment furnished or installed, giving the Unit No.,

System No., Manufacturer's Model No., Drawing No., and

equipment performance charts and/or curves, as applicable.

3. Control diagrams, as installed by the manufacturer.

4. Sequence of operation by the control manufacturer.

5. Wiring diagrams, as-installed and color coded, of

electrical motor controller connections and interlock

connections of all equipment listed in the Equipment

Schedules.

6. Diagrammatic location, function and tag numbers of each

valve.

7. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.

8. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.

9. Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts lists of all

functional components of the system furnished or installed,

control diagrams and wiring diagrams, giving Unit No.,

System No., Manufacturer's Model No., and Manufacturer's

Part No.

10. Recommended spare parts list. 11. List of nearest local suppliers of all equipment. 12. Balancing test reports and as-built drawings for all

systems.

D. This service manual shall be submitted for approval at final

acceptance. Failure to submit the diagram and service manual

will delay final inspection and acceptance of the work by the

owner.




E. Approved copies of the service manual shall be delivered to the

owner on or before the date of the final inspection, and each

copy of the service manual shall be identical.

F. After approval by the owner, the control diagram shall be

mounted in a neat frame with suitable backing, under clear

glass and installed where directed.

END OF SECTION 230100



HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING 230130 - 1

SECTION 230130 - HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment,

ducts, plenums, and system components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ASCS: Air systems cleaning specialist.

B. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For an ASCS.

B. Strategies and procedures plan.

C. Cleanliness verification report.


A. ASCS Qualifications: A certified member of NADCA.

1. Certification: Employ an ASCS certified by NADCA on a

full-time basis.

2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified as an ASCS by

NADCA.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for fibrous-

glass ducts.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and

system components to determine appropriate methods, tools, and

equipment required for performance of the Work.

B. Perform "Project Evaluation and Recommendation" according to

NADCA ACR 2006.

C. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a written plan that includes strategies and step-by-

step procedures. At a minimum, include the following:

1. Supervisor contact information.

2. Work schedule including location, times, and impact on

occupied areas.

3. Methods and materials planned for each HVAC component

type.

4. Required support from other trades.

5. Equipment and material storage requirements.

6. Exhaust equipment setup locations.

B. Use the existing service openings, as required for proper

cleaning, at various points of the HVAC system for physical

and mechanical entry and for inspection.

C. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006, "Guidelines for Constructing

Service Openings in HVAC Systems" Section.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006.




B. Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within

the HVAC system.

C. Systems and Components to Be Cleaned:

1. Air devices for supply and return air.

2. Air-terminal units.

3. Ductwork:

a. Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes, to the

air-handling unit.

b. Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit.

c. Exhaust-air ducts.

D. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is

not dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning

process.

E. Particulate Collection:

1. For particulate collection equipment, include adequate

filtration to contain debris removed. Locate equipment

downwind and away from all air intakes and other points

of entry into the building.

2. HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency

for particles sized 0.3 micrometer or larger shall be

used where the particulate collection equipment is

exhausting inside the building,

F. Control odors and mist vapors during the cleaning and

restoration process.

G. Mark the position of manual volume dampers and air-directional

mechanical devices inside the system prior to cleaning.

Restore them to their marked position on completion of

cleaning.

H. System components shall be cleaned so that all HVAC system

components are visibly clean. On completion, all components

must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to

cleaning operations.

I. Clean all air-distribution devices, registers, grilles, and

diffusers.

J. Clean visible surface contamination deposits according to

NADCA ACR 2006 and the following:




1. Clean air-handling units, airstream surfaces, components,

condensate collectors, and drains.

2. Ensure that a suitable operative drainage system is in

place prior to beginning wash-down procedures.

3. Clean evaporator coils, reheat coils, and other airstream

components.

K. Duct Systems:

1. Create service openings in the HVAC system as necessary

to accommodate cleaning. Note that the main supply air

system is a medium pressure, high velocity type system

and will require special care in ensuring no post

cleaning leakage.

2. Note that pre-design testing has been performed. Results

of this testing indicate there was minimal duct leakage

pre-construction.

3. Mechanically clean duct systems specified to remove all

visible contaminants so that the systems are capable of

passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see

NADCA ACR 2006).

L. Debris removed from the HVAC system shall be disposed of

according to applicable Federal, state, and local

requirements.

M. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Source-Removal Cleaning Methods: The HVAC system shall

be cleaned using source-removal mechanical cleaning

methods designed to extract contaminants from within the

HVAC system and to safely remove these contaminants from

the facility. No cleaning method, or combination of

methods, shall be used that could potentially damage

components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the

integrity of the system.

a. Use continuously operating vacuum-collection devices

to keep each section being cleaned under negative

pressure.

b. Cleaning methods that require mechanical agitation

devices to dislodge debris that is adhered to

interior surfaces of HVAC system components shall be

equipped to safely remove these devices. Cleaning

methods shall not damage the integrity of HVAC




system components or damage porous surface materials

such as duct and plenum liners.

2. Cleaning Mineral-Fiber Insulation Components:

a. Fibrous-glass thermal or acoustical insulation

elements present in equipment or ductwork shall be

thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment

while the HVAC system is under constant negative

pressure and shall not be permitted to get wet

according to NADCA ACR 2006.

b. Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to

fibrous-glass components and will render the system

capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests

(see NADCA ACR 2006).

c. Fibrous materials that become wet shall be discarded

and replaced.

N. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings:

1. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings if active fungal

growth is reasonably suspected or where unacceptable

levels of fungal contamination have been verified. Apply

antimicrobial agents and coatings according to

manufacturer's written recommendations and EPA

registration listing after the removal of surface

deposits and debris.

2. When used, antimicrobial treatments and coatings shall be

applied after the system is rendered clean.

3. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings directly onto

surfaces of interior ductwork.

4. Sanitizing agent products shall be registered by the EPA

as specifically intended for use in HVAC systems and

ductwork.

3.4 CLEANLINESS VERIFICATION

A. Verify cleanliness according to NADCA ACR 2006, "Verification

of HVAC System Cleanliness" Section.

B. Verify HVAC system cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and

before applying any treatment or introducing any treatment-

related substance to the HVAC system, including biocidal

agents and coatings.




C. Perform visual inspection for cleanliness. If no contaminants

are evident through visual inspection, the HVAC system shall

be considered clean. If visible contaminants are evident

through visual inspection, those portions of the system where

contaminants are visible shall be re-cleaned and subjected to

re-inspection for cleanliness.

D. Prepare a written cleanliness verification report. At a

minimum, include the following:

1. Written documentation of the success of the cleaning.

2. Site inspection reports, initialed by supervisor,

including notation on areas of inspection, as verified

through visual inspection.

3. Surface comparison test results if required.

4. Gravimetric analysis (nonporous surfaces only).

5. System areas found to be damaged.

3.5 RESTORATION

A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts,

plenums, and components according to NADCA ACR 2006,

"Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems" Section.

B. Restore service openings capable of future reopening. Comply

with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Include

location of service openings in Project closeout report.

C. Replace fibrous-glass materials that cannot be restored by

cleaning or resurfacing. Comply with requirements in

Section 233113 "Metal Ducts".

D. Replace damaged insulation according to Section 230713 "Duct

Insulation."

E. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.

F. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match

opened materials and shall have removable closure panels

fitted with gaskets and fasteners.

END OF SECTION 230130.51



COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and

polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium,

squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up

to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or

shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field

installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory

devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and

required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation

location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and

at altitude of 0 feet (0 m) above sea level.




B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start,

accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds,

at installed altitude and environment, with indicated

operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or

considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium Efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

E. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings

suitable for radial and thrust loading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

G. Insulation: Class F.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard

starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and

larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to

suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor

application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.




B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor

type.

C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or

sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open

power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds

a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically

reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PIPING 230517 - 1

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Grout.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,

with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E,

Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Link Seal or comparable product by one

of the following:

1. Metraflex Company (The).

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3030&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456811682&mf=04&src=wd




2. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

3. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field

assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped

to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required

for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Glass reinforced nylon.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-

resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure

plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS


requirements, provide Link Seal or comparable product by one

of the following:

1. Presealed Systems.

B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop

assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit

has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to

match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and

volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and

exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in

roofs and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed,

select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm)

annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and

walls.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and

concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs

formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.

2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both

surfaces.

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs

and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of

walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations.

Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete

walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into

building and manholes.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for

piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size.

Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in

penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and

install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten

bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to

expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they

are constructed.




B. Pipe must be supported on both sides of opening. Sleeve-seal

system shall not support weight of pipe.

C. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both

surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop

flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

D. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

E. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal

fittings.

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-

penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-

steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)

annular clear space between piping and sleeve

for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel

wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)

annular clear space between piping and sleeve

for installing sleeve-seal system.




ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 1

SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and

rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass

with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and

spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and

rough-brass finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish,

concealed hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.




2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for

fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls,

ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube,

and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers

opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall:

One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or

split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed

hinge.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in

Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-

casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in

Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or

split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed

hinge.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished

Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-

piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with

rough-brass finish.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-

brass or split-casting brass type with rough-brass

finish.




2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type

with concealed hinge.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in

Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished

Spaces: Split-casting brass type with polished,

chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-

casting brass type with rough-brass finish.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass

type with rough-brass finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room

floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube,

and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers

opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using

new materials.




METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 1

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.

2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

3. Thermowells.

4. Dial-type pressure gages.

5. Gage attachments.

6. Test plugs.

7. Test-plug kits.

8. Vortex-shedding flowmeters.

9. Time-transient clamp on flow meters.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" for chilled water flow

meters.

2. Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties"

for steam and condensate meters.

3. Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for

installation of meter transmitters.



B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.





A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from

manufacturer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to

include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide products by one of the following:

1. Ashcroft.

2. Dwyer.

3. Trerice.

4. Approved equal.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and hermetically sealed type(s); stainless

steel with 3-inch nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings and scales in deg F.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, with adjustable angle, rigid,

back, or rigid, bottom as appropriate for service, with

unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Safety glass.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.




L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS



1. Ashcroft.

2. Dwyer.

3. Trerice.

4. Approved equal.

B. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.

2. Case: Cast aluminum 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise

indicated.

3. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

4. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic

liquid.

5. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently

etched scale markings graduated in deg F.

6. Window: Glass.

7. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated

shroud.

b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

8. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 scale division.

2.3 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment

to air duct and made to hold thermometer stem.

2.4 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:





2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for

insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: Brass.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: 304 Stainless steel.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is

indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 3/4 ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1-1/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw

threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or

stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer

bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated

piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell internal

screw thread to size of thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.5 PRESSURE GAGES


provide products by one of the following or equivalent:

1. Ashcroft.

2. Dwyer.

3. Trerice.

B. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


2. Gauges to be rated at least two times the expected

operating pressure.

3. Case: Liquid-filled type; 304 stainless steel; 4-1/2-inch

nominal diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise

indicated.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1

pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet

type is indicated.




6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and

connection to pointer.

7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched

scale markings graduated in psi.

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

9. Window: Laminated safety glass.

10. Ring: 304 Stainless steel.

11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include

extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 pipe

threads.

C. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or

NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.7 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into

piping tee fitting.

B. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed

and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be

installed in insulated piping.

C. Thread Size: NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

D. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200

deg F.

E. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.8 TEST-PLUG KITS

A. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing two thermometer(s),

one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer

sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be




of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into

piping.

B. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with

1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element.

Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F.

C. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with

1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element.

Dial range shall be at least 20 to 240 deg F.

D. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to

3-inch- diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least

0 to 200 psig.

E. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument

padding.

2.9 STEAM FLOWMETERS

A. Products:

1. Azbil-Vortek PN AX2322-SLED1ASC-PG-50-XX or approved

equal.

2. Isolation Valve shall be Azbil-Vortek PN VASF-150 or

approved equal.

3. Approval for an equivalent flowmeter will be given if the

proposed flowmeter meets the specifications as

established by the above and upon an actual successful

demonstration of the equipment on the intended or similar

application.

B. Vortex-Shedding Flowmeters:

1. The steam flowmeter shall operate on the vortex shedding

principal.

a. The vortices shall be generated by an all welded

shedder bar placed in the flow stream.

b. The shedder bar causes vortices to be generated,

which represent the specific volume flow of fluid

(liquid, gas, steam), at a rate that is linearly

proportional to the process flow rate.

c. The meter will have an all welded velocity sensing

tab located behind the shedder bar.




d. There shall be no cavities that can clog to cause

the meter to lose functionality and there shall be

no moving parts.

e. The meter shall use piezoelectric crystals to sense

the vortices as they are being shed. The crystals

shall be located out of the flow stream via an all

welded design that uses no process seal or

elastomer.

2. The meter shall be built with and measure velocity,

temperature and pressure in a single, self-contained

package inclusive of the sensors & electronics.

3. The process temperature range shall be from -330 Deg F to

500 Deg F (optionally to 750 Deg F).

4. The sensor wetted parts shall be solid 316L SS with

Teflon used for the packing gland and pressure sensor, no

other materials allowed.

5. Power input shall be 100-240 VAC, 12-36 VDC 9 watts max

four-wire design, or 12-36 VDC 1 watt max two-wire loop

powered design.

6. The electronics shall be intelligent and able to read the

process volumetric flow, the temperature and pressure and

output a calculated mass flow without the need for an

external flow computer or sensors.

a. They shall have the ability to be field programmed

to output compensated mass flow of gas, steam and or

liquid via a communicator or from a front panel

display without the need for an external flow

computer.

b. The meter shall be able to calculate 5 different

variables, (volumetric flow, mass flow, temperature,

pressure & density) and simultaneously output 3 of

the 5 variables via analog outputs at a minimum.

c. The analog outputs shall be field programmable and

any combination of 3 of the 5 process variables can

be chosen.

d. The meter shall have the option to accept a

secondary temperature input into the electronics to

calculate Energy consumption. This can be used in

the sent or return line and can calculate the

enthalpy of chilled water, hot water, steam and

condensate return.




7. Flowmeter accuracy shall be 1.5% of mass flow rate for

gas and steam, 2% of temperature, .3% of full scale for

pressure, 0.5% of density for gas and steam.

8. The meter shall be capable of outputting three 4-20ma

analog outputs, binary output pulse or alarm for relay

total and meter status and RS-232.

a. Additional output capability to include RS232, RS-

484, Modbus RTU, BACnet TCPIP, Modbus IP, BACnet IP.

b. The meter shall be capable of field enhancements to

change or add to the originally supplied outputs;

returning the meter to the factory for these changes

is not acceptable.

c. The meter shall have the ability to status alarm for

conditions of fault.

d. The meter shall have internal memory to allow for

data analysis history when troubleshooting.

9. Additional Requirements: In addition to the above

requirements, the following applies.

a. Application will be for steam flow at 10-20 psig

typical in a 5” CS sch 40 pipe.

b. Sensor process connection is to have 150 # flanged

end & integral display-transmitter.

c. Field programmable output is to be one 4-20 loop

powered signal for mass flow rate.

d. Power input is to be two-wire loop powered 24 VDC.

e. Flowmeter will be insertion style.

f. A 2” 150# flanged full port isolation valve is to be

included with inner clearance sufficient to allow

the sensor to pass thru.

g. Sensor location is to be as recommended for

sufficient straight run.

2.10 CHILLED WATER FLOWMETERS

A. Products:

1. Flexim Model 7407 or approved equal.

B. General Hardware Requirements:




1. The meter must be a clamp-on design that mounts

externally on the pipe with no liquid contact.

2. The meter must utilize the transit-time flow measurement

technique and employ the use of TWO microprocessors and

have the ability to monitor TWO independent flow and

channels simultaneously (second channel optional with the

ability to be field retrofitted). Two microprocessors

allow for faster speed of response, better accuracy in

difficult applications, multiple channel capability &

flexibility for multiple output formats.

3. The meter must be supplied with the ability to employ an

alternate Doppler measurement technique for liquids with

high air or solid content with no additional hardware.

This must be an integral standard function without the

need for additional sensors or hardware.

4. The meter must have a flow transducer encased in

stainless steel with an integral 13 ft (minimum length)

armored stainless steel jacketed TRIAX cable. The use of

COAX cable and BNC cable connections will not be

acceptable. Non-stainless cable & sensor electrical

connectors have been known failure points and are not

acceptable.

5. All transducer markings and identification must be laser

scribed and solvent resistant. The use of adhesive

labels for transducer identification will not be

acceptable. This allows for reliable hardware tracking

after installation.

6. All calibration and transducer data must reside in a non-

volatile memory chip located in the transducer junction

box or flow meter. This allows for any future changes or

factory support work (sensor calibration or replacement)

without the need to send out the display-transmitter.

7. The meter must have the ability to automatically

recognize the transducers when connected. Programming of

the transducer type into the meter will not be

acceptable. This allows for a more reliable performance

with less operator input.

8. The meter shall be capable of outputting multiple 4-20ma,

Voltage 0-1v or 0-10v, high precision frequency 0-1kHz or

0-10kHz galvanically isolated, RS-232, RS-484, Modbus

RTU, BACnet TCPIP, Modbus IP, BACnet IP, binary output

pulse or alarm for relay total and meter status. The

meter shall be capable of field enhancements to change or




add to the originally supplied outputs; returning the

meter to the factory for these changes is not acceptable.

9. The meter shall have the ability to status alarm for

conditions of fault, empty pipe fault, flow direction,

sound velocity limit, flow velocity limit.

10. The meter shall have the ability to set the 4-20ma to a

settable status condition (i.e. 2ma for an alarm

condition). The specific setting of the 4-20 signal

during an alarm condition will be defined by the college

before the equipment commissioning.

11. The meter shall have RS-232 output and internal memory

with a minimum storage of 100K data points. This allows

for data analysis history when troubleshooting.

12. The flowmeter electronics shall be housed in a NEMA 4X

enclosure and must have the ability to indicate flow

rate, flow velocity, mass flow, total flow, signal

strength, signal quality, liquid sonic velocity, Reynolds

regime (laminar/turbulent/transition).

13. Clamp on Sensors to be mounted & held in place by 304 SS

band straps. Other mounting methods are not allowed. A

short profile is needed to allow the insulation & vapor

barrier to be completely repaired by the supplier after

commissioning.

C. Performance and accuracy requirements:

1. Standard flow sensors must hold accuracy specification

(stated below) for process temperatures from 0 to 298 F.

The metering electronics must have the ability to operate

HIGH TEMPERATURE flow sensors capable of measuring liquid

flows at temperatures up to 750oF.

2. The transducers are to have the ability to be coupled

using permanent coupling pads (grease is NOT acceptable).

Permanent couplant pads eliminate the need for sensor

maintenance (ie, recoupling the sensors by reapplying

couplant). Pipe insulation is to be permanently repaired

& vapor sealed after initial installation &

commissioning.

3. The flow transducers must have a multi-point wet flow

calibration certificate accredited from an international

standards agency with an accuracy of better than 0.6%.

Only one flow sensor PN must be able to measure chilled

water in CS or Cu pipes from 2.5 to 18” OD. This allows

for a minimum of spare parts.




4. The meter must be of a type that requires NO zero

calibration. The zero calibration must be factory pre-set

automatic without the need for zero check/calibration

after installation. There must not be any zero drift

mechanisms (i.e. temperature change related drift) as the

meters can NOT be installed with any low-flow cutoff or

“deadband”. Automatic integral flow sensor temperature

compensation is required to eliminate the flow

measurement drift due to temperature variations; this

allows for improved measurement accuracy & low-end

sensitivity below 0.25 fps. The method for temperature

compensation corresponds to ANSI/ASME MFC-5.1-2011.

5. The meter must also provide automatic Reynolds number,

liquid sonic velocity compensation, and have built in

liquid tables for automatic sound velocity, viscosity,

and density settings.

6. The meter must have the ability to have dynamic

(automatic) compensation for changes in viscosity and

density.

D. Energy Management:

1. Because the college will likely need the measurement of

Energy (BTU/Tons with temperature for supply & return

pipes) in the future, the following will apply to the

meters being supplied.

2. The meter must be able to be field retrofitted to be able

to measure energy along with flow.

3. The meter must be able to be field retrofitted to have

inputs for 4 wire RTD’s and have a capability of

accepting either 100 or 1000 ohm platinum RTD pairs. Two

or three wire designs will not be acceptable. The

temperature sensors & circuit must have a measurement

accuracy of .03oF over a temperature range of 32 oF to

400 oF. RTD’s must be Rated IEC 751 Class A and provided

as matched pairs to an accuracy of 0.03oF. Four wire

sensors allow for longer sensor cables without a loss in

performance. The temperature accuracy is critical in

properly measuring energy rate.

4. The meter must have the ability to indicate BTU rate, Ton

rate, flow rate, mass flow, total BTU’s, total tons in

addition to the units above.




5. The energy (BTU/Tons) calculation must meet standard

EN1434 for proper accuracy. Other methods are

unacceptable.

E. Support Requirements:

1. Standard hardware lead times must be 3 weeks ARO.

Expedited delivery in less than 3 business days for all

hardware items is required for any emergencies. Factory

phone support must be available 24 hours a day for both

weekdays & weekends. A local factory trained & approved

service technician needs to be located within 20 miles of

the installation site to provide field support. This

allows for expedient, economical support.

2. All hardware to carry a warranty for 12 months after

installation or 18 months after shipment from the

factory, whichever occurs first. Warranty covers both

hardware repair/replacement & factory labor.

F. Additional Requirements:

1. Specific Flow Metering Requirements for the Forcina

Building.

a. This is in addition to the above requirements.

b. Dual channel meter, wall mount electronics powered

by 115 VAC. Transmission of data by self-powered 4-

20 mADC signals (two). One (1) new meter is

required. All sensor mounting hardware of sensors

to be included.

c. Measurement of the flow rate of Chilled Water

(Channel A). The pipe is 6” CS sch 40. Flow sensors

are required to be rated to 266 F media & surface

temperature for both flow accuracy temperature

compensation & environmental protection.

1) This will require sensor extension cables past

13 ft. It is estimated for the Chilled Water

measurement that the total length of sensor

extension cable will not exceed 100 feet. A

sensor cable junction box and 100 feet of

sensor extension cable is to be supplied.

d. Measurement of the flow rate of Steam Condensate

(Channel B). The pipe is 2” CS sch 40 or 80. Flow

sensors are required to be rated to 392 F media &

surface temperature for both flow accuracy

temperature compensation & environmental protection.




1) This will require sensor extension cables past

13 ft. It is estimated for the steam

condensate flow rate measurement that the total

length of sensor extension cable will not

exceed 100 feet. A sensor cable junction box

and 100 feet of sensor extension cable is to be

supplied.

2. Commissioning

a. This is to be quoted as a separate line item

b. Equipment to be commissioned by factory authorized

service person, who will provide a full report

inclusive of programming, diagnostics & traceable

accuracy certificates for each sensor. Supplier

responsibilities include mounting the flow sensors,

repairing the insulation, terminating the sensor

cable, programming the meter & testing the output

signal to the data acquisition system. Repair of

the insulation will be by the use of white

insulation tape; if new insulation is needed, the

supplier will not be responsible to supply new

insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe

diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer

connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust

vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts.

Attach to duct with screws.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with

pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.




H. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for

fluids (except steam).

I. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure

gage for steam.

J. Install test plugs in piping tees.

K. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible

positions for easy viewing.

L. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories

between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping

systems.

N. Coordinate with BAS contractor for installation of

transmitters.

O. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in

accessible and readable positions.

P. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for

attachment to portable indicators.

Q. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling

units.

3. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts.

R. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3. Hot water supply and return piping feeding AHU-1.

4. Chilled water supply and return piping feeding AHU-1.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to

allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and

equipment.




B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to


B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best

visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall

be the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall

be the following:

1. Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.


C. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each chiller shall be

the following:



D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-

handling units and built-up central systems shall be one of

the following:



E. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each hydronic heat

exchanger shall be the following:



F. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-

recovery unit shall be the following:






G. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank

shall be the following:



H. Thermometers at outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air

ducts shall be the following:

1. Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.

I. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell

insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F

B. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.

C. Scale Range for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: 30 to 300

deg F.

D. Scale Range for Air Ducts: 25 to 125 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve


1. Liquid-filled direct-mounted, metal case.


B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-

water and condenser-water connection shall be the following:



C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be

the following:






3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

C. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 0 to 60 psi for LPS.

D. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 0 to 200 psi for HPS.

3.8 FLOWMETER SCHEDULE

A. Flowmeters for Chilled-Water Piping: Rime transient ultrasonic

type.

B. Flowmeters for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: Vortex-

shedding type.




GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1

SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





B. Section 232213 “Steam and Steam Condensate Piping and Valves”

for requirements of steam and steam condensate system valves.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

2. Iron, lug-type (single-flange) butterfly valves.

3. Bronze swing check valves.

4. Iron swing check valves.

5. Iron, center-guided check valves.

6. Bronze gate valves.

7. Iron gate valves.

8. Bronze globe valves.

9. Iron globe valves.

10. Chainwheels.


1. Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.




D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

H. WOG: Water, oil, gas working pressure for temperatures up to

100° F.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from

single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions

and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent

rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of

functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.




2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient

dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary,

store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to

exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or

rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of

valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than

indicated and as required for system pressures and

temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200)

and larger.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and

smaller.

4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel,

stem, or other actuator; of size and with chain for

mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation"

Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem

extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-

thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that

allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal

or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:




1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron

valves.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide products by one of the following or equivalent:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water

Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa).

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Bronze.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

2.3 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat

and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:



http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6017&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd












b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

d. DeZurik Water Controls.

e. Hammond Valve.

f. Milwaukee Valve Company.

g. NIBCO INC.

h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water

Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.

b. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional

dead-end service at rated pressure without use of

downstream flange.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536,

ductile iron.

e. Seat: EPDM.

f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.

g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat

and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:






d. DeZurik Water Controls.

e. Hammond Valve.

f. Milwaukee Valve Company.

g. NIBCO INC.

h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water

Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:























c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional

dead-end service at rated pressure without use of

downstream flange.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536,

ductile iron.

e. Seat: EPDM.

f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.

g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:



a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.



d. Hammond Valve.

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water

Technologies, Inc.

h. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.


c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:




















e. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

2.5 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal

Seats:




b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

2. Description:


b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating:

200 psig (1380 kPa).

c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating:

150 psig (1035 kPa).

d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted

bonnet.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Composition.

h. Seat Ring: Bronze.

i. Disc Holder: Bronze.

j. Disc: PTFE or TFE.












k. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.6 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with

Resilient Seat:



a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. Hammond Valve.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-125.


200 psig (1380 kPa).


150 psig (1035 kPa).

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.

e. Style: Globe, spring loaded.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Seat: EPDM.

2.7 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:





c. Hammond Valve.


e. NIBCO INC.


Technologies, Inc.

g. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

















2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat

and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

B. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:





c. Hammond Valve.


e. NIBCO INC.


Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:




and union-ring bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.


h. Handwheel: Malleable iron[, bronze, or aluminum].

2.8 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:















c. Hammond Valve.


e. NIBCO INC.


Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



200 psig (1380 kPa).


150 psig (1035 kPa).

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted

bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Disc: Solid wedge.

h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:





c. Hammond Valve.


e. NIBCO INC.


Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



500 psig (3450 kPa).



















300 psig (2070 kPa).

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted

bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Disc: Solid wedge.

h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.9 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:





c. Hammond Valve.


e. NIBCO INC.


Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:




and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

B. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:




b. Hammond Valve.














c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO INC.

e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water

Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:




and union-ring bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.


h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.10 IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:





c. Hammond Valve.


e. NIBCO INC.


Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted

bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.














B. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves:






d. Hammond Valve.

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water

Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted

bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.11 CHAINWHEELS



1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.

2. Roto Hammer Industries.

3. Trumbull Industries.

B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim,

brackets, and chain.

1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to

mount actuator on valve.

2. Attachment: For connection to butterfly valve stems.

3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron of type and

size required for valve. Include zinc coating.
















4. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel of size required to fit

sprocket rim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign

matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such

as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed.

Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and

cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause

leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material.

Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material

composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from

defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new

valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install shut-off duty valves along with unions or flanges in

the supply and return connections for each piece of equipment.

These valves shall be arranged to allow service, maintenance,

and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Install shut-off duty valves at each supply and return branch

connection to the mains.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support

where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above

center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow for full stem movement.




F. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly and gate valves

NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger when the centerline of the valve

shaft is 96 inches (2400 mm) or greater above floor. Extend

chains to 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished floor.

G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as

follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge

pin level.

2. Center-Guided Check Valves: In vertical position,

between flanges.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been

tested and put into service but before final adjusting and

balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Bubble-tight Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate

valves.

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Lug-type single-flange

valves.

3. Throttling Service except Steam: Calibrated balancing

valves.

4. Throttling Service, Steam: Globe valves.

5. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check

valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron, center-guided,

resilient-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not

available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or

CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end

connections:




1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded

or soldered ends.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded

ends.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100):

Flanged or threaded ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Flanged

ends.

3.5 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends

instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze

trim.

3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May

be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron, Lug-type (Single-Flange) Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-

1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300): 200 CWP, EPDM seat,

aluminum-bronze or nickel plated or powder-coated

ductile-iron or stainless-steel disc suitable for bubble-

tight dead-end service.

3. Iron, Lug-type (Single-Flange) Butterfly Valves, NPS 14

to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600): 150 CWP, EPDM seat,

aluminum-bronze or nickel plated or powder-coated


tight dead-end service.

4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 nonmetallic-to-metal

seats.

5. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, globe,

resilient seat.

3.6 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:




1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends

instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze

trim.

3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May

be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron, Lug-type (Single-Flange) Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-

1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300): 200 CWP, EPDM seat,

aluminum-bronze or nickel-plated or powder-coated


tight and dead-end service.

3. Iron, Lug-type (Single-Flange) Butterfly Valves, NPS 14

to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600): 150 CWP, EPDM seat,

aluminum-bronze or nickel-plated or powder-coated


tight and dead-end service.

4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic-to-metal

seats.

5. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, globe,

resilient seat.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

3. Fastener systems.


1. Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC

Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and

Fittings Industry Inc.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for piping and

equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and

stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe

stands, capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined

operating weight of supported equipment and connected

systems and components.

3. Design hangers and supports for piping and equipment and

obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Welding certificates.





A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures

and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding

Code - Steel”.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators

according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-

fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot

dipped.

3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer

made of carbon steel.

4. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper

Industries

b. Empire Industries, Inc.

c. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

d. Globe Pipe Hangers Products, Inc.

e. Grinnell Corp.

f. National Pipe Hanger Corporation

2.2 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS



1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

2. Clement Support Services.

3. ERICO International Corporation.

4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

5. PHS Industries, Inc.









6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology &

Products, Inc.

7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552,

Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive

strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent

treated, ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with

125-psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover

lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for

piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and

shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated

or stainless- steel anchors, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where

used.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry,

hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable

for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and

MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments

as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or

shield for insulated piping.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight

concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in

concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool

manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-

actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after

concrete is placed and completely cured. Install

fasteners according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary

attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other

accessories.

E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and

seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of

movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and

similar units.

F. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to

prevent swaying.

G. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach

to structural steel. Install additional attachments at

concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,

NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping.

Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings

at top of inserts.




H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that

piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not

be transmitted to connected equipment.

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide

indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe

deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

J. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature:

Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use

thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to

match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by

ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if

insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill

interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining

insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used.

Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe

NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold

piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of

180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used.

Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe

NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch

thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch

thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch

thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 2424 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.




5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced

calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as

long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same

thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe

hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of

shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for

shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds;

and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and

develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows

after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match

adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads

equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support

rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint.

Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and

supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting.

Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-

painted surfaces.




1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry

film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply

with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and

applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

B. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for

piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

C. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for

general service applications.

D. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and

tubing.

E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise

indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,

install the following types:

1. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS

Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36,

requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of

insulation.

2. Tee & H slides (MSS Type 35): For support from below

where horizontal movement caused by expansion and

contraction might occur.

3. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension

of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

4. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes

NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by

expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is not necessary.

5. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of

pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused

by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical

adjustment is not necessary.




6. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For

support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral

adjustment during installation might be required in

addition to expansion and contraction.

F. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except

as specified in piping system Sections, install the following

types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support

of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For

support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends

are required for riser clamps.

G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except


types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6

inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F

piping installations.

3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450

deg F piping installations.

H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except


types:

1. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to

center of bottom flange of beams.

2. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to

bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes

are large.

3. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below

or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use

one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

4. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams

if flexibility at beam is required.




I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following

types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To

fill interior voids with insulation that matches

adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended

in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing

insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated

pipe.

J. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors

instead of building attachments where required in concrete

construction.




HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING 230533 - 1

SECTION 230533 - HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes heat tracing for HVAC piping with the

following electric heating cables:

1. Self-regulating, parallel resistance.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and

furnished specialties and accessories.

2. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and

electrical power requirement for each electric heating

cable required.

B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment

details.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables

to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES


requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or

comparable product by one of the following or equivalent:

1. BriskHeat.

2. Chromalox.

3. Delta-Therm Corporation.

4. Easy Heat; a division of EGS Electrical Group LLC.

5. Pyrotenax; a brand of Tyco Thermal Controls LLC.

6. Raychem; a brand of Tyco Thermal Controls LLC.

7. Thermon Americas Inc.

8. Trasor Corp.

B. Comply with IEEE 515.1.

C. Heating Element: Pair of parallel No. 16 AWG, nickel-coated,

stranded copper bus wires embedded in crosslinked conductive

polymer core, which varies heat output in response to

temperature along its length. Terminate with waterproof,

factory-assembled, nonheating leads with connectors at one

end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be

capable of crossing over itself once without overheating.

D. Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant polyolefin.

E. Cable Cover: Tinned-copper braid and polyolefin outer jacket.

F. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg. F.

G. Maximum Exposure Temperature (Power Off): 150 deg. F.

H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and

labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,

and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure.













2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-

conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end seals and splice

kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or

as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Warning Labels: Refer to Section 230553 "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing";

vinyl, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick, and with pressure-

sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation,

Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation,

6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating

cables for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric

heating cables are free of burrs and sharp protrusions.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install electric heating cable across expansion joints

according to manufacturer's written instructions; use slack

cable to allow movement without damage to cable.

B. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested

and before insulation is installed.

C. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1.

D. Install insulation over piping with electric cables according

to Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."




E. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is

equipped with electric heating cables.

F. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized

service representative to test and inspect components,

assemblies, and equipment installations, including

connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the

assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Perform tests after cable installation but before

application of coverings such as insulation, wall or

ceiling construction, or concrete.

2. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation

integrity before energizing.

3. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize

and measure voltage and current simultaneously.

C. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input

power after applying thermal insulation on pipe-mounted

cables.

D. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads,

from damage during construction.




B. Remove and replace damaged heat-tracing cables.




VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 1

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric hangers.



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload

capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength,

fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of

vibration isolation device type required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel

Hanger Rods:


available manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

b. California Dynamics Corporation.

c. Isolation Technology, Inc.

d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.







VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 2

e. Mason Industries, Inc.

f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper

threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to

allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower

hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber,

neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting

bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to

steel contact.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation

control devices for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors

to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions


3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change

of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in

stresses or misalignment.







IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Duct labels.

5. Stencils.

6. Valve tags.

7. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation

required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment

to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in

maintenance manuals.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch

minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes

for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required

label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if

viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for

viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately

larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include

secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size

of principal lettering.

6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible

with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or

unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is

indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is

specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be

labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment

identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is

specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation

and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels

for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having

predrilled holes for attachment hardware.




B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Red.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160

deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label

content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing

distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing

distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger

lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary

lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with

label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus

emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted,

color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing

flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic

formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to

pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service

using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings;

also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system

service lettering to accommodate both directions or as

separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow

direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances

up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for

greater viewing distances.




2.4 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Self-adhesive, vinyl labels printed

with UV resistant eco-solvent ink, reinforced with UV,

chemical, abrasion, and moisture resistant laminate layer.

Suitable for indoor and outdoor industrial environments.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Blue.

D. Service Temperature range: -40 F to +176 F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label

content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing

distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing

distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger

lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary

lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

G. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service

using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings;

also include an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service

lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate

unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for

piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and

having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment

hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system

abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room

or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or

modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves

for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.




1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could

impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil,

grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion

of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be

applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations

of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical

ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of

mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is

exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts,

tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as

follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for

fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not

obvious, mark each pipe at branch.




3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls,

floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that

permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of

origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run.

Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping

and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit

intermediately spaced labels.

B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate

direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is

allowed in both directions.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green

background.

2. Heating Water Piping: Black letters on a safety-yellow

background.

3. Low-Pressure Steam Piping: White letters on a safety-

purple background.

4. High-Pressure Steam Piping: White letters on a safety-

purple background.

5. Steam Condensate Piping: White letters on a safety-purple

background.

3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated (outdoors) and self-adhesive

(indoors) duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from

concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each

space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable

ceiling system.

3.6 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems,

except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated




equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and

lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and

similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units.

List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size,

shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those

indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches round.

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round.

c. Low-Pressure Steam: 1-1/2 inches round.

d. High-Pressure Steam: 1-1/2 inches round.

e. Steam Condensate: 1-1/2 inches round.

3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to,

equipment and other items where required.

1. Systems requiring warning tags:

a. Heat traced piping.




TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pre-construction flow measurement.

2. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.

3. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to

Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this

Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.




B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 15 days of

Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents

review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of

Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and

step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified

by AABC NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and

certified by AABC NEBB or TABB

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data

and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB

plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this

Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms

approved by Architect.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As

described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."




1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing

building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner

during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test.

Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water

distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Existing Air Handling Unit and Return Fan:

a. Measure and record all data as outlined in

paragraphs 3.16E, 3.16F, 3.16G.

2. Existing Exhaust Fan Systems:

a. Measure and record fan data as outlined in paragraph

3.16G.

3. Existing induction unit terminal units:

a. Measure and record fan data as outlined in paragraph

3.16I.

4. Air Outlets and Inlets:

a. Measure and record airflow at each supply, return

and exhaust diffuser, register, grille, etc.

5. Existing Hot Water and Chilled Water Pumps:

a. Measure and record pump data as outlined in

paragraph 3.16K.

b.




B. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project

requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs

that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

C. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test

ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,

balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers.

Verify that locations of these balancing devices are

accessible.

D. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and

equipment.

E. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions,

statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions

and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

F. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for

supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the

leakage class of connected ducts as specified in

Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from

adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are

sealed and fire-stopped if required.

G. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump

curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and

requirements, including system effects that can create

undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced

capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance

ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions

different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air

systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans

and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct

Design." Compare results with the design data and

installed conditions.

H. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that

field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting

specified in individual Sections have been performed.

I. Examine test reports specified in individual system and

equipment Sections.




J. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings

are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with

functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and

verify that they are accessible and their controls are

connected and functioning.

L. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced

by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

M. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their

intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and

for clean and straight fins.

O. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the

suction piping.

P. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC

equipment.

Q. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance

of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to

changes in conditions. Record default set points if different

from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step

procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify

the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control

valves are operational.




7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-

pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing

devices is provided.

8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions

for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system

according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111, SMACNA's

"HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing"] and in

this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for

installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary

for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts

with same material and thickness as used to construct

ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct

access doors that comply with requirements in

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed

materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier,

and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"

Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and

Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control

positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control

levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final

settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-

pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain

manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing

procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet

volumes with required fan volumes.




B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct

layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate

diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for

accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and

dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the

supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical

interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized

thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow

path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and

functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in

Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the

maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for

Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at

terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total

airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine

actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream

from the fan as practical and upstream from




restrictions in ducts such as elbows and

transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet

or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans

in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible,

upstream from the flexible connection, and

downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans

through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes

up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-

handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the

time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other

devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment,

and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design

static pressures versus actual static pressures.

Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend

adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan

speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with

requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for

adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve

indicated air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor

overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-

speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-

motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur.

Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating,

economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the

maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major

branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified

tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts

is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,




measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and

calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the

balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the

proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have

been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch

ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or

outlet manufacturer's written instructions and

calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated

airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values.

Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than

extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within

specified tolerances of indicated quantities without

generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed

by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper

distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all

terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan,

place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-

point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition

until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the

indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow

terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch

ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the

fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume

systems as follows:

1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and

exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-

cooling load.




2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the

supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static

pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering

static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not

less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's

recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static

pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge

system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated

airflow.

4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust

controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum

airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written

instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow

is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from

terminal units the same as described for constant-volume

air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust

controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum

airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction

in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air

systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum

airflow, report the condition but leave outlets

balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating

at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and

inlets the same as described for constant-volume air

systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal

unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the

main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate

static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record final fan-performance data.

C. For induction type VAV terminal units:

1. Adjust return air damper linkages such that return air

damper is closed when primary air damper is at full

cooling position.




2. Adjust return air linkage such that the total unit

airflow remains constant when primary damper modulates

down to minimum open position.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in

sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of

branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate.

Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping

layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according

to the following, in addition to the general preparation

procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate

pressure for highest vent.

4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of

operation, and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified

differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed

position when pump is positive-displacement type unless

several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to

heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle

main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is

not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from

vents when manually operated.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control

valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-

exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic

systems.




3.9 PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS

A. Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each

piece of equipment.

B. Measure and record upstream and downstream steam pressure of

pressure-reducing valves.

C. Check settings and operation of automatic temperature-control

valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing

valves. Record final settings.

D. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record

settings.

E. Verify the operation of each steam trap.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure.

E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves.

Record settings.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions

and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.




B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for

proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum.

Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper

operation. Record observations including name of controller

manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water

coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.

3. Water pressure drop.

4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for

cooling coils.

6. Airflow.

7. Air pressure drop.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING

SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment

that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and

static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values

to motor nameplate information.

3. Check the condition of filters.

4. Check the condition of coils.

5. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain

trap.

6. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper

lubrication.

7. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and

the results of the measurements taken. Report

deficiencies.




B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems,

inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to

verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and

refurbished. Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.

2. Coils are clean and fins combed.

3. Drain pans are clean.

4. Fans are clean.

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are

corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the

extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation

work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to

the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan

speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work

result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds

that are within the acceptable limits defined by

equipment manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates

and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make

equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates.

If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment

adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.14 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within

the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans:

Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.




3.15 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of

the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article,

prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to

systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance

measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to

HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for

performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe

completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled

procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found

in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate

report for each system and each building floor for systems

serving multiple floors.

3.16 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and

divide the report into separate sections for tested systems

and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the

report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified

testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along

with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report

data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment

installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do

not include Shop Drawings and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries,

include the following data:

1. Title page.




2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined

for each section of the report. Number each page in the

report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it

varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name,

type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of

reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms

including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air

dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage

of maximum pitch diameter.

e. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

f. Other system operating conditions that affect

performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and

hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with

single-line diagram and include the following:




1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust

airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with

coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of

adjustments in inches.

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of


3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total air flow rate in cfm.




b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches

wg.

g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches

wg.

h. Outdoor airflow in cfm.

i. Return airflow in cfm.

j. Outdoor-air damper position.

k. Return-air damper position.

l. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft..

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg).

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in

deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.




f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in

deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in

deg F.

h. Water flow rate in gpm.

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans,

include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of


2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of


g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.




e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports:

Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-

section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft..

g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual air flow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.


c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft..


a. Primary air flow rate (full cooling) in cfm.

b. Total air flow rate (full cooling) in cfm.

c. Primary air flow rate (minimum cooling) in cfm.

d. Total air flow rate (minimum cooling) in cfm.




e. Air velocity in fpm.

f. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.

g. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.

h. Final air flow rate in cfm.

i. Final velocity in fpm.

j. Space temperature in deg F.

J. Air Outlet and Inlet Reports: For each supply, return, and

exhaust diffuser, register and grille, include the following:

1. Airflow.

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of

terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.


c. Room or riser served.

d. Coil make and size.

e. Flowmeter type.


a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.

e. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the

shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.




f. Water flow rate in gpm.

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head

or psig.

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.

c. Actual impeller size in inches.

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.

i. Final water flow rate in gpm.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.




3.17 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each

system and randomly check measurements to verify that the

system is operating according to the final test and

balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air

outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of

terminals.

c. Measure room temperature at each

thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading

to the set point.

d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final

balance position.

e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the

final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by

random checks verifies that testing and balancing are

complete and accurately documented in the final report,

request that a final inspection be made by Architect.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall

conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect.

3. Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented

in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall

be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements

recorded or the extent of measurements that can be

accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the

measurements documented in the final report by more than

the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted

as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10

percent of the total measurements checked during the

final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.




C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass

final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise

the final report and balancing device settings to include

all changes; resubmit the final report and request a

second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may

contract the services of another TAB contractor to

complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and

deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB

contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.18 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to

verify that balanced conditions are being maintained

throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not

performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions,

perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter

conditions.




DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply air.

2. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.


1. Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."

2. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for double wall insulated

ducts and duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include

thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and

jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and

inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and

hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings,

dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of

insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.





A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have

successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another

craft training program certified by the Department of Labor,

Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by

manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type

and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and

insulation shields specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct

insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop

Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and

finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems

and, where required, after installing and testing heat

tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that

have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as

rapidly as possible in each area of construction.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule,

General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and

"Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"

articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury

compounds.

C. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers

bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553,

Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FRK /

FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified

in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

available products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,

jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself

and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A.




a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.,

a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.Eagle

Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.















b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a

business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.Mon-

Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC

content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-

3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap

seams and joints.





a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a

business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-50.Mon-Eco

Industries, Inc.; 22-25.




2.3 MASTICS


jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC



B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on

below ambient services.




a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a

business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B,

0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.




















3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70

percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:





a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76.Eagle

Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.


business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.

c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,

jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: Aluminum.

6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC



2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets

on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are

indicated, comply with the following:

1. FSK/FRP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced

scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with

ASTM C 1136, Type II.












2.6 TAPES

A. FSK/FRK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching

factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with

ASTM C 1136.




a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.

b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes

Division; Fasson 0827.

c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.

d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

5. Elongation: 2 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of

FSK tape.

2.7 SECUREMENTS

1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation

Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is

capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated,

securely in position indicated when self-locking washer

is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

available products that may be incorporated into the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base

Insul-Hangers.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel

sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.













c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel,

fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length

to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer.

Product with demonstrated capability to bond

insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated

without damaging insulation, hangers, and

substrates.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers

formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet,

with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation

securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in

diameter.




1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers

incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure

permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-

inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.




to, the following:

a. C & F Wire.

2.8 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1

inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005,

3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.











PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and

are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive

insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect

insulation application.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with

smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout

the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders,

jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system

as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and

suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not

corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in

either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom

of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and

end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and

finishing.




G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end

joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by

insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and

penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and

other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and

around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are

indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of

attachment to supported item to point of attachment to

structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to

structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to

tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation

inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by


J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's

recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of

same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with

adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges

of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches.

Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at

2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier

mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation

material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain

vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier

mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct

flanges and fittings.




L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation

more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions.

Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing

material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches

beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches

similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall

Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation,

terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with

joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and

outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor

applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends.

Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing

and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition

Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation

continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies,

terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and

externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match

adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct

insulation at least 2 inches.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure

with adhesive and insulation pins.




1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended

coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of

duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to

all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed

washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on

sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of

vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller,

place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct.

Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints,

and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches

, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches

maximum from insulation joints. Install additional

pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at

cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,

rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed

washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed

washers or bend parallel with insulation surface.

Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching

insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below

ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier.

Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints

with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and

one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent

insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching

staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of

factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier

mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape

or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums

operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals.

Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic

applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face,




along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a

width equal to two times the insulation thickness,

but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and

transitions with a full insulation section for each

surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct

elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the

elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that

protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide

strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on

alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with

pins spaced 6 inches) o.c.

3.6 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply air.

3. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.

4. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.

2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to

comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

5. Flexible connectors.

6. Vibration-control devices.

7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.7 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation


1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1-lb/cu. ft.

nominal density. Minimum R-value: R-6




B. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be

the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1-lb/cu. ft.

nominal density. Minimum R-value: R-6

C. Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be one

of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft.

nominal density.

3.8 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If

more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection

from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Exposed, round, supply-air duct insulation shall be as

specified in Section 233113 Metal Ducts.




HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 230716 - 1

SECTION 230716 - HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC equipment that

is not factory insulated:

1. Steam to hot water converters.

2. Expansion/compression tanks.

3. Air separators.

4. Steam flash tanks, flash separators, moisture separators,

and blow-off tanks.


1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."

2. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."




jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).




inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and

hanger.

2. Detail removable insulation at equipment connections.


4. Detail field application for each equipment type.
















1.7 COORDINATION




B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for

equipment insulation application.

1.8 SCHEDULING










PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Breeching Insulation Schedule"

and "Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where

insulating materials shall be applied.


compounds.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass

fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board

material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393,

Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to

ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or

more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu

x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket

requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article.




a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.

b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.

c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.




a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing

Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
















a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES




B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A.









d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.




C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with

MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket

lap seams and joints.































1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim

with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136,

Type I.

2.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I,

unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Jacket:





a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing

Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel

Jacketing.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003,

3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied

jacket schedules.

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied

jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.




a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.














d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and

1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.





7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of

ASJ tape.

2.7 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:




a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and

Springs.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;

Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing

seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation

Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is

capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated,

securely in position indicated when self-locking washer

is in place.




1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base

Insul-Hangers.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.













b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel

sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel,

fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length

to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer.

Product with demonstrated capability to bond

insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated

without damaging insulation, hangers, and

substrates.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers

formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet,

with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation

securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in

diameter.




1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers

incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure

permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-

inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.




to, the following:

a. C & F Wire.

2.8 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1

inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005,

3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.











PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have

been tested and are free of defects.




3.2 PREPARATION




B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing

heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that

apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating

cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces,

use demineralized water.




the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or

retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of

equipment as specified in insulation system schedules.









of horizontal runs.



F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and

finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end



H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and



1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and

around anchor attachments.




structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to

structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to

tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation

inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent

insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to

protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support,

and shield.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's


K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:




adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges

of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.




3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches.

Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at

2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier

mastic over staples.



vapor seal.


mastic on seams and joints.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation


M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions.


N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing




O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the

following:


2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks

and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins

and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended

coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of

tank and vessel surfaces.




2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely

as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel

insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight

joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.

4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation

hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels

as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure

vessels.

b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are

compatible with service temperature and with

substrate.

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is

3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches

o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved

sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels.

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed

washers.

g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed

washers or bend parallel with insulation surface.

Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching

insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or

aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with

insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not

permitted or practical and where insulation support rings

are not provided, install a girdle network for securing

insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around

the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps,

turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one

circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6

inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two

circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire

ring around each end and around outer periphery of center

openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially

from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle.

Install additional circumferential girdles along the body

of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches




o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie

wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3

inches.

8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment

access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements

that require frequent removal for service and inspection.

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes,

handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient,

apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and

punctures in insulation.

3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap

at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal

seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with

weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer.

Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at

end joints.


A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency

to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect field-insulated equipment,

randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied

jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their

installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one

location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the

"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment,

remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work

if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.7 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If

more than one material is listed for a type of equipment,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.




B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory

insulated.

C. Steam-to-hot-water converter insulation shall be the

following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.

D. Heating-hot-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall

be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick.

E. Heating-hot-water air-separator insulation shall be the

following:


F. Steam condensate tank and receiver insulation shall be the

following:


G. Steam flash-tank, flash-separator, moisture-separator, and

blow-off-tank insulation shall be the following:


3.8 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with

factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over

the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials

listed is Contractor's option.

C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat

Surfaces up to 72 Inches:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.032 inch thick.

D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with

Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with 4-by-1-Inch Box Ribs:

0.032 inch thick.




HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Condensate drain piping, outdoors.

2. Chilled-water piping, indoors and outdoors.

3. Heating hot-water piping, indoors and outdoors.

4. Steam and steam condensate piping, indoors.


1. Section 230529 “Hangers and Support for HVAC Piping and

Equipment for Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts.”

2. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."

3. Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."




jackets (both factory and field applied if any).




inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside

insulation.

3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings,

flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of

insulation.

















1.7 COORDINATION




B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for

piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop

Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and

finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING










PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule,

General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor,

Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where

insulating materials shall be applied.


compounds.

C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing

agents in the manufacturing process.

D. Pipe Insulation Type CG; Cellular Glass: Inorganic,

incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed,

rigid, hermetically sealed cells.


provide one of the following (or equal):

a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas.

2. Block Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type I.

3. Special-Shaped Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 552,

Type III.

4. Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type IV.

5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with factory-applied jacket:

Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.

6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and

ASTM C 585.

E. Pipe Insulation Type EL; Flexible Elastomeric Insulation:

Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.



a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

2. Tubular Materials: Comply with ASTM Type C 534, Type

(Grade) I.

3. Sheet Materials: Comply with ASTM Type C 534, Type

(Grade) I.










4. Apply 2 coats of finish (paint) to all surfaces that are

exposed to view or weather. This finish (paint) shall be

provided by the insulation manufacturer and shall be

applied in accordance with the insulation manufacturer’s

published instructions.

F. Pipe Insulation Type MF; Mineral-Fiber: Glass fibers bonded

with a thermosetting resin.



a. Johns Manville

b. Knauf Insulation

c. Manson Insulation Inc.

d. Owens Corning

2. Mineral-Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with

ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.



a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing

Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.


provide the following:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES




B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting

urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a

service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.


















2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content

of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. For indoor applications, adhesive shall comply with the

testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the

Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources

Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A,

Type II, Class I.



a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.



d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.









D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A.































E. ASJ, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,

Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and

joints.

















F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.



a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.

b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent

Welding Adhesive.

c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.

d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.






















2.4 MASTICS


jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC



B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; use only indoors on above-

and below-ambient services.





b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Contractor shall provide proof of performance and

certified test reports from vapor-barrier mastic

manufacturer, to support all product literature claims.

3. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B,

0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.



percent by weight.

6. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; use only outdoors on

above- and below-ambient services.


provide one of the following or equal):


a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel.














2. Contractor shall provide proof of performance and

certified test reports from vapor-barrier mastic

manufacturer to support all product literature claims.

3. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil

dry film thickness.



percent by weight.

6. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and

shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and

substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a

VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to





a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2.



c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating

for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths

over pipe insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18

to plus 82 deg C).

5. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

(or equal):















e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:













5. Color: Aluminum.

6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content



7. For indoor applications, sealants shall comply with the





C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, Vinyl, and PVC Jacket Flashing

Sealants:
























5. Color: White.

6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content



7. For indoor applications, sealants shall comply with the









1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with

aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive,

acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective

strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I,

unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim

with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying

with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll

stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness

is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.



a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.

d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.









2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: White.

4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if

available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end

caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and

P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

D. Metal Jacket:


provide the following (or equal):


a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing

Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel

Jacketing.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M),

Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop / field sizing

or factory cut and rolled to size.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied

jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 2.5-mil-

thick polysurlyn.

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil-

thick polysurlyn.

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree,

short- and long-radius elbows.

3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.

5) End caps.

6) Beveled collars.

7) Valve covers.








8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-

fabricated fitting covers are not available.

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied

jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.



a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.




d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and

1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.




6. Tensile Strength: in width.

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of

ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-

applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with

ASTM C 1136.


provide the following (or equal):

a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.




d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm).

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.















6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.

7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of

FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied

PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and

outdoor applications.



a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.

b. Compac Corporation; 130.

c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 6 mils.




D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic

adhesive.



a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.



c. Compac Corporation; 120.

d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches.





2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:















a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and

Springs.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005 to

match jacket material; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4

inch wide with wing seal use closed seal for 84-inch and

larger diameters.

3. Springs:

a. Use springs for 84-inch and larger (2130-mm-)

diameter applications and on applications with rapid

changes in expansion and contraction.

b. Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with

ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring

size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching stainless steel insulation

staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.


provide products by one of the following (or equal):

a. C & F Wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and

are free of defects.


3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.









3.2 PREPARATION




B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing

heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that

apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating

cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces,

use demineralized water.




the length of piping including fittings, valves, and

specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or

retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of

pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.






of horizontal runs.



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices for

insulation to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during transport, storage,

application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end



I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.




J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and



1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around

anchor attachments.




structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure

with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly

join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts

with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe

insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to

protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support,

and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's


L. Apply adhesives mastics, and sealants only when the ambient

temperature will remain in the manufacturer’s recommended

temperature range until these products have set or cured.

Provide ambient conditioning, if required, to meet this

requirement.

M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:




adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches .

Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of

pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4

inches o.c.

a. For services that will see below-ambient

temperatures apply vapor-barrier mastic over

staples.






vapor seal.


mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe

flanges and fittings.

N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation


O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions.


P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing




Q. For above-ambient services only, do not install insulation to

the following:


2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install

insulation continuously through roof penetrations.



terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with




This joint shall be located on the indoor side of the

penetration. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing

at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.




4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall

Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with interior face

of sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall

Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall

penetrations.



terminate insulation at inside wall surface and seal with




This joint shall be located on the face of the wall. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing

and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition

Penetrations That Are Not Fire Rated: Install insulation

continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition

Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through

penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint

sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Sleeve: All floor penetrations shall be provided with a

“lightweight” (Schedule 10) sleeve. This sleeve shall be

sealed to the structure, providing a watertight

penetration. The sleeve shall extend 2” above the

finished floor and shall provide adequate clearance to

accept the full thickness of the insulation.

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor

sleeve.

3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."




3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation

materials except where more specific requirements are

specified in various pipe insulation material installation

articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers,

Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers,

flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous

thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or

mitered fittings made from same material and density as

adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted

tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive.

Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform

contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or

sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness

as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation

to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in

place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or

sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and

thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining

pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness

of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is

thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the

bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill

joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or

sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and

thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining

pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness

of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is

thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket

flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without

damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable




reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services,

provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized

preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of

pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is

thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of

finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-

barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather

mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic

with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a

smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied

jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin,

install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,

valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end

caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing

using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each

union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe

labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure

gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow

meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated

pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it

to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish

with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands

and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal

seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier

mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-

ambient temperature services, secure laps with outward-

clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.




4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-

ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs.

Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as

recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal

with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of

pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of

flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe

insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange

insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight

pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block

insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints

with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight

segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available,

install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation.

Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to

valve body.

2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to

allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange


3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that

allow passage of air to surface being insulated.





1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.



insulation.



pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of

same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with

manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings

in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being

insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with

manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings

in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being

insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same

material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut

sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body.

Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to




4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams

with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to

surface being insulated.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe

with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming

insulation materials.




2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal

seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier

mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-

ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched

staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-

ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs.

Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as

recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal

with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of

pipe flange.



insulation.



pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints

with flashing sealant.



segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not

available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to

a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure

insulation materials with wire or bands.



segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered

sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to







3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams

and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder

jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap

at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal

applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and

joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam

and joint edge.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap

at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal

seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with

weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer.

Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at

end joints.

3.10 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has

fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's

recommended protective coating.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and

second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency

to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:




1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly

selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket

and insulation in layers in reverse order of their

installation.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work

if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and

thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe

size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping

system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's

option.

3.13 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water:

1. NPS 3 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches

thick with ASJ-SSL.

2. NPS 4 to NPS 12: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches

thick with ASJ-SSL.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:

1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches

thick with ASJ-SSL.

C. Steam and Steam Condensate, 350 Deg F and Below:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 3

inches thick with ASJ-SSL.

2. NPS 1 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 4


D. Steam and Steam Condensate, above 350 Deg F:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:




a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 4.5


2. NPS 1 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II 5 inches

thick with ASJ-SSL.

3.14 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick with factory applied

ASJ vapor barrier.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:



ASJ.

C. Cooling Coil Condensate:



ASJ vapor barrier.

3.15 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with

factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over

the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials

listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Exposed (Chilled Water, Heating Hot Water, Cooling

Coil Condensate):

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z-Shaped Locking Seam:

0.024 inch thick.




INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-1

SECTION 230900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK DESCRIPTION / SUMMARY ......................... 4

1.2 GENERAL GOALS AND REQUIREMENTS .............................. 4

1.3 Definitions ................................................. 4

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS ............................................... 6

1.5 RELATED SECTIONS / DOCUMENTS ................................ 9

1.6 WORK WITHIN OTHER SECTIONS ................................. 10

1.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ......................................... 11

1.8 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ........................................ 12

1.9 INTEGRATION ................................................ 13

1.10 SYSTEM CAPACITY / SCALABILITY .............................. 13

1.11 ACTION SUBMITTALS .......................................... 14

1.12 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ................................... 17

1.13 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (O&MS) ................................. 18

1.14 MAINTENANCE / OTHER MATERIAL SUBMITTALS .................... 19

1.15 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................... 19

1.16 CODES AND STANDARDS ........................................ 21

1.17 OWNER TRAINING ............................................. 21

1.18 WARRANTY ................................................... 22

1.19 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL .......................... 23

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................. 23

2.1 MATERIALS .................................................. 23

2.2 COMMUNICATION .............................................. 23

2.3 MANUFACTURERS .............................................. 24

2.4 DDC SYSTEM GENERAL ......................................... 24

2.5 BUILDING APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (BAC) ..................... 25

2.6 INTEGRATION APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (IAC) .................. 26

2.7 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (CAC) ....................... 28

2.8 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC) ..................... 29

2.9 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE ........................................ 30

2.10 CONTROLLER INPUT / OUTPUT INTERFACE ........................ 32




2.11 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING .......................... 34

2.12 CONTROL PANELS / ENCLOSURES ................................ 35

2.13 NETWORK SWITCHES ........................................... 37

2.14 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ......................... 37

2.15 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................... 38

2.16 TEMPERATURE SENSORS / RTDS / TRANSMITTERS .................. 41

2.17 FLUID WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ................ 43

2.18 WATER FLOW METER / TRANSMITTER ............................. 44

2.19 AIR PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS / TRANSDUCERS .................... 45

2.20 HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS ...................................... 46

2.21 COMBINATION HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS .......... 47

2.22 CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) TRANSMITTER ........................... 48

2.23 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATION ................................ 49

2.24 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK .................................... 50

2.25 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES .................................. 50

2.26 CONTROL VALVES ............................................. 54

2.27 ACTUATORS .................................................. 56

2.28 CONTROL CABLES ............................................. 61

2.29 INSTRUMENT WET PRESSURE TUBING ............................. 61

2.30 INSTRUMENT AIR PRESSURE TUBING ............................. 62

PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................. 62

3.1 SCHEDULE ................................................... 62

3.2 EXAMINATION ................................................ 62

3.3 PROTECTION ................................................. 63

3.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................ 63

3.5 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP ........................................ 64

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ...................................... 65

3.7 COORDINATION ............................................... 65

3.8 EXISTING EQUIPMENT ......................................... 67

3.9 WIRING ..................................................... 67

3.10 COMMUNICATION WIRING ....................................... 70

3.11 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS .................................... 70

3.12 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION ................................... 72

3.13 VFD CONFIGURATION .......................................... 72

3.14 ACTUATORS .................................................. 72

3.15 WARNING LABELS ............................................. 73




3.16 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING ...................... 74

3.17 PROGRAMMING ................................................ 74

3.18 SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING ....................................... 75

3.19 COMMISSIONING .............................................. 75




PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK DESCRIPTION / SUMMARY

A. This section includes requirements for the control and

monitoring of HVAC systems, ancillary systems which includes

but is not limited to:

1. Control Panels

2. Programmable Logic (DDC) Controllers

3. System Architecture and Networking

4. Instrumentation

5. Integration with Equipment and Systems

6. Alarming, Trending, Notifications

7. Contractor Testing / Verification

8. Submittals and O&Ms

9. Training

1.2 GENERAL GOALS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. The Building Management System (BMS) serves multiple purposes

including control of HVAC equipment / systems, HVAC, power and

ancillary system monitoring, interface for operations, data

archiving, and analysis tools.

1.3 Definitions

A. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB): A BIBB defines

a small portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to

perform a particular task. BIBBS are combined to build the

BACnet functional requirements for a device in a

specification.

B. BACnet/BACnet Standard: BACnet communication requirements as

defined by the latest version of ASHRAE/ANSI 135 and approved

addenda.

C. Control Systems Server: A computer(s) that maintain(s) the

DDC systems configuration, controller configuration and

programing backups, graphics, data archives, and can serve as

the primary system web server.

D. Controller: Intelligent stand-alone control device.

Controller is a generic reference to building controllers,




custom application controllers, and application specific

controllers.

E. Direct Digital Control: Microprocessor-based control

including Analog / Digital conversion and program logic.

F. Ethernet: Local area network based on IEEE 802.3 standards.

G. Firmware: Software (programs or data) that has been written

onto read-only memory (ROM). Firmware is a combination of

software and hardware. Storage media with ROMs that have data

or programs recorded on them are firmware.

H. Front End: A generic term referring to the visual aspect of

the DDC control system where the operator interacts. Also

known as the GUI, HMI, operator interface, etc.

I. Gateway: Bi-directional protocol translator connecting /

integrating control systems that use different communication

protocols.

J. Integration: Communication (can be one way or bi-directional)

between disperate systems using open protocols or proprietary

protocols and translating with a gateway.

K. KY Pulse: A term used by the metering industry to describe a

method of measuring consumption of electricity that is based

on a relay changing status in response to the rotation of the

disk in the meter.

L. Local Area Network: Computer or control system communications

network limited to local building or campus.

M. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment

operating at less than 50 V or remote-control, signaling and

power-limited circuits.

N. Master-Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP): Data link protocol as

defined by the BACnet standard.

O. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data

which uses the TCP/IP data transfer application layer.

P. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and

display of equipment status data, metered electrical parameter

values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm

signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.

Q. Point-to-Point: Serial communication as defined in the BACnet

standard.




R. Primary Controlling LAN: High speed, peer-to-peer controller

LAN connecting BCs and optionally AACs and ASCs. Refer to

System Architecture below.

S. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS): A

written document that identifies the particular options

specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.

T. Router: A device that connects two or more networks at the

network layer.

U. RMS: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is

the square root of the mean value of the square of the voltage

values during a complete cycle.

V. RS-232: A TIA standard for asynchronous serial data

communications between terminal devices.

W. RS-485: A TIA standard for multipoint communications using

twisted-pair cabling.

X. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply; used both in singular and

plural context.

Y. Wiring: Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. AHU = Air Handling Unit

B. AI = Analog Input

C. AO = Analog Output

D. ASC = Application Specific Controller

E. AV = Analog Value

F. BAC = Building Application Controller

G. BAS = Building Automation System (BAS, BMS, EMS, and FMS are

Synonymous)

H. BMS = Building Management System (BAS, BMS, EMS, and FMS are

Synonymous)

I. BI = Binary Input

J. BO = Binary Output




K. BV = Binary Value

L. CAC = Custom Application Controller

M. CHWP = Chilled Water Pump

N. CHWR = Chilled Water Return

O. CHWS = Chilled Water Supply

P. CRAC = Computer Room Air Conditioning Unit

Q. CRAH = Computer Room Air Handlers

R. CS = "Cold Side" (of a Heat Exchanger)

S. CWP = Condenser Water Pump

T. CWR = Condenser Water Return

U. CWS = Condenser Water Supply

V. CV = Control Valve

W. DDC = Direct Digital Control

X. DEG C = Degrees Celsius

Y. DEG F = Degrees Fahrenheit

Z. ΔP = Delta (Difference in) Pressure

AA. DP = Differential Pressure

BB. ΔT = Delta (Difference in) Temperature

CC. DT = Differential Temperature

DD. E/P = Electric-to-Pneumatic

EE. EMS = Energy Management System (BAS, BMS, EMS, and FMS are

Synonymous)

FF. EWT = Entering Water Temperature

GG. FAT = Factory Acceptance Testing

HH. FMS = Facility Management System (BAS, BMS, EMS, and FMS are Synonymous)

II. GUI = Graphical User Interface




JJ. HEX = Heat Exchanger HMI = Human Machine Interface

KK. HMI = Human Machine Interface

LL. HRU = Heat Recover Unit

MM. HS = "Hot Side" (of a Heat Exchanger)

NN. HTML = Hypertext markup language

OO. HVAC = Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning

PP. IAC = Integration Application Controller

QQ. I/O = Input / output (referring to controllers)

RR. I/P = Current-to-Pneumatic

SS. ICP = Integration Control Panel

TT. LAN = Local area network; sometimes plural as "LANs."

UU. LCD = Liquid crystal display.

VV. LED = Light Emitting Diode

WW. LEED = Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

XX. LWT = Leaving Water Temperature

YY. MOV = Motor Operated control Valve

ZZ. NEC = National Electric Code

AAA. NFPA = National Fire Protection Association

BBB. O&M = Operation and Maintenance

CCC. OAF = Outside Air Fan

DDD. OS = Operating System

EEE. OSA = Outside Air

FFF. OSHA = Occupational Safety and Health Administration

GGG. PC = Personal computer; sometimes plural as "PCs."

HHH. PDF = Protected document format file type

III. PIU = Powered Induction Unit




JJJ. RH = Relative Humidity

KKK. RTD = Resistive Thermal Device

LLL. SAT = Site Acceptance Testing

MMM. SMS = Short Message Service

NNN. TCP/IP = Transport control protocol / Internet protocol

OOO. TEF = Toilet Exhaust Fan

PPP. THD = Total harmonic distortion.

QQQ. UPS = Uninterruptible Power Supply

RRR. VAV = Variable Air Volume

SSS. VFD = Variable Frequency Drive

TTT. VSD = Variable Speed Drive

UUU. WAN = Wide area network

VVV. ZAM = Zone Addressable Module

1.5 RELATED SECTIONS / DOCUMENTS




B. Contractor shall reference these sections as they apply for

portions of this scope of work:

1. Construction Drawings.

2. Division 01: General Requirements

3. 230100 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

4. 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

5. 230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

6. 230523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC

7. 230533 HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING

8. 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

9. 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

10. 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING

11. 232116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES




12. 232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS

13. 232213 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING AND VALVES

14. 232216 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES

15. 232223 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS

16. 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

17. 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

18. 233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS

19. 235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

20. 237313 CUSTOM OUTDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS

21. 238219 FAN COIL UNITS

22. 238239 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

1.6 WORK WITHIN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Devices furnished within this section for installation by

another section:

1. Temperature Wells, control valves and pressure transducer

wells shall be provided by BAS contractor and installed

per Section 232113, Hydronic Piping, and Section 232123,

Hydronic Pumps.

2. Air Terminal Unit controllers shall be provided by BAS

contractor, and shipped to Air Terminal Unit manufacturer

by the BAS contractor for factory mounting.

B. The following work integrated to / affected by this section’s

scope of work is furnished and installed per other Sections:

1. Mechanical equipment furnished and installed per:

a. Section 230519, Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping.

b. Section 230533, Heat Tracing for HVAC.

c. Section 232123, Hydronic Pumps.

d. Section 232223, Steam Condensate Pumps.

e. Section 233423, HVAC Power Ventilators.

f. Section 233600, Air Terminal Units.

g. Section 235700, Heat Exchangers for HVAC.

h. 237313, Custom Outdoor Air Handing Units.

i. Section 238219, Fan Coil Units.

j. Section 238239, Cabinet Unit Heaters.




2. Control dampers specified internal to air handling

equipment per Section 237313, Custom Outdoor Air Handling

Units.

3. Piping and manual valves (unless specified otherwise)

furnished and installed per Section 232113, Hydronic

Piping, and Section 232123, Hydronic Pumps.

4. All wells, taps, and openings in piping and ductwork for

monitoring devices, flow switches, and alarms shall be

installed per Section 232113, Hydronic Piping, and

Section 232123, Hydronic Pumps, as directed per this

section.

5. Power wiring to motors, starters, and VFDs furnished and

installed per Division 26.

6. Power wiring to control panels per Division 26.

Dedicated 120V power to the control panels shall only be

extended to locations where shown on the plans, any

further extensions required shall be performed per this

Section.

7. Duct Smoke detectors are provided and installed by other

sections. Any monitoring of auxiliary contacts for use

to fulfill requirements of this section are included in

this section

C. The following work is installed under this Section but

furnished within other Sections:

1. Steam flowmeter transmitters. (Meter body shall be

installed by the Mechanical Contractor.)

2. Chilled water flowmeter transmitters.

1.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic

points with current data within 5 seconds.

2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic

points with current data within 5 seconds.

3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than 2 seconds

between operator command of a binary object and device

reaction.

4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of

analog values to control units or workstation within 3

seconds.




5. Alarm Annunciation Time: Annunciate alarm at the

operator workstation within 30 seconds of event

(inclusive of any programmable alarm delays). Multiple

workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of

each other. Remote users (mobile / tablet) must receive

alarms within 120 seconds of event (inclusive of any

programmable alarm delays.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Programmable controllers

shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update

process values and outputs at least once per second.

7. Control Loop Stability: Control loops shall maintain

measured variable at setpoint within the dead bands /

tolerances listed below:

a. Airflow: +/- 5%

b. Space Temperature: +/- 1°F

c. Duct Temperature: +/- 1°F

d. Space Humidity: +/- 5 %RH

e. Fluid Pressure: +/- 1.5 psi from 0-150 psi

f. CO2: +/- 100 ppm from 0-2000 ppm

1.8 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The BMS system architecture shall be distributed.

B. Where possible, control shall be done local at the field

controller level and shall have minimal requirements for

controller peer-to-peer communication. Where communication

between controllers is required to fulfill the sequence of

operations, appropriate fail safe measures (automatic system

responses) shall be incorporated into the automation design

and the programming logic.

C. Where the mechanical design provides redundant modular

equipment redundant controllers for each ‘module’ are not

required (unless specified otherwise).

D. Provide a dedicated programmable controller for each piece of

equipment or system (i.e. central plant). Avoid splitting

control of a system / equipment between several controllers

unless approved by engineer for redundancy reasons.




1.9 INTEGRATION

A. Serial or Ethernet-based communication integration is required

to all of the following equipment unless specified otherwise:

1. VFDs

2. Generators / ATS

B. The intent is for the facility BMS to monitor all important

data available to support facility management and assist with

troubleshooting. The purpose of the integration (level of

control vs. monitoring) is defined by the project documents

including the sequence of operations.

C. The BMS shall support ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) communication

interface for remote control and monitoring from an operator

workstation as well as collect appropriate point data for

trending, alarming, notifications, data displays, etc.

D. Management level integration shall be Ethernet TCP/IP-based

integration to provide the anticipated bandwidth needed for

data sharing.

E. Field level integration shall be Ethernet TCP/IP-based or 2-

wire serial (RS-485).

F. All hardware and software required to transmit and receive all

necessary system information such as point data, point values,

as defined in the project documents shall be included in this

scope of work.

G. Coordinate with equipment / system vendors and other

contractors to obtain complete communication interface point

lists and configuration details.

H. Integration point lists provided initially (if any) are to be

used as a guideline. The complete list of available points

shall be provided to the owner and owner’s representative

along with the recommended points for approval.

1.10 SYSTEM CAPACITY / SCALABILITY

A. Provisions shall be made to support physical and logical

expansion of the system. This includes appropriately sized

power supplies, free real estate inside the control panel

enclosure, cable raceways and conduits, controller memory and

spare I/O capacity.




B. Ensure there is sufficient capacity in control transformers to

support the addition of additional controllers and

instrumentation (i.e. minimum of 30% spare).

C. Ensure there is sufficient capacity for creation of additional

trends and alarms above what is specified in this section and

on the project documents (i.e. minimum of 30% spare).

D. Ensure there is sufficient I/O capacity on the physical

controllers, expansion modules, and in the integration

hardware and software drivers to support future addition of

points (i.e. minimum of 30% spare).

E. Ensure there is sufficient capacity of ports at network

switches for local access with a PC or laptop (i.e. minimum of

30% spare).


A. Provide a project-specific engineering package for this scope

of work. The package shall be submitted to the owner within

30 days of being contracted for this work.

B. Provide a complete and comprehensive submittal package

representing all required aspects of the system. Partial

submittals are not acceptable.

C. The submittal package includes the following requirements and

content:

1. Submit combined book-marked .pdf file format with

sections clearly delineated.

2. Point list - A list of all AI, BI, AO, BO, AV, and BV

points with point descriptions, point addresses, and

point names (if applicable). The point list should also

identify hardwired versus software points, analog point

signal type (e.g. 0-10Vdc, 4-20mA) and signal range (e.g.

0-7 bar, 0-50°C), engineering units, binary point units

(e.g. open/closed, on/off), new integrated system

addresses and existing system addresses. Complete point

lists and recommended monitoring points for equipment /

systems with communication interfaces should also be

provided.

3. List of materials – Provide on the control drawings for

each drawing which includes materials as well as a

complete master list. Lists should including quantities,

detailed part numbers, product description, and vendor

name. Materials should have unique tag identifiers to




allow easy cross reference to the master list and product

data sheets

4. Product data sheets - A data sheet for all items listed

in the List of Materials. Where some data sheets may

apply to more than one product, clearly indicate which

product details apply to the product being provided.

Where model selection information is listed, clearly

identify the part number and associated details being

selected. Include the unique material tag identifier on

the product data sheets and any table of contents to

allow easy cross reference with the control drawings.

5. Proposed cable types and colors (and description of use /

system) should be included for review.

6. Proposed labeling type and schema should be included for

review.

7. Control valve schedule including flow characteristic

(e.g. linear, equal percentage), valve type (e.g. ball,

globe, butterfly), valve configuration (e.g. 2-way, 3-

way) valve Cv, pressure drop, connection size and type,

close-off pressure. Provide actuator data including

normal and failed positions, control voltage, control

signal (24Vac, 4-20mA) and signal type (e.g. 2-position,

modulating).

8. Control damper schedule including size, blade type,

leakage, flow characteristics, linkages, and actuator

information if purchased as an assembly.

9. Engineered drawings

a. System architecture / riser diagram – showing all

control panels, controllers, monitored systems /

equipment, communication buses, Ethernet networks,

servers, workstations, routers, switches, etc.

Provide indication of any junction boxes and routing

details to help future troubleshooting (e.g. floor

riser / penetration locations)

b. Communication bus detailed drawings – showing

detailed terminations and end of line locations.

c. Floor plan drawings – showing location of operator

workstation, control panels, sensors, network wiring

routing, etc.

d. Control panel layout – An overview of the control

panel faces and all devices installed on the door

and backplanes. This should include controllers,

power supplies, relays, instruments, air pressure

tubing, breakers, terminal blocks. All components




should be labeled to match the identifiers used in

the master bill of materials and individual drawing

list of materials.

e. Control panel wiring diagrams – A detailed diagram

showing power components, wiring and terminations,

integration and control wiring, wire types,

termination numbers, conductor colors, polarity,

labeling, high voltage service descriptions, network

device wiring, control panel locations, etc.

f. Point-to-point controller wiring diagrams - showing

terminals, intermittent junction boxes / splices,

cable types, cable labeling. For analog points,

signal type and range should be identified (e.g. 4-

20mA = 0 – 100 psi). For digital points, signal

state and meaning should be identified (e.g.

contacts closed = alarm, or output on = Start). The

reader should be able to follow the power and

control wiring from the field device to the

termination point on the BMS controller without the

need to reference multiple / other drawings.

References to typical installation details are not

acceptable unless approved by the owner and

engineer.

10. Sequence of Operation Narrative – provide high level

sequence of operation narrative based on engineer’s

sequence. This sequence shall describe the overall

sequence intent but without the additional technical

details included in the detailed sequence.

11. Detailed Sequence of Operation – provide detailed

sequence of operation (a.k.a. “programmer’s sequence”)

based on engineer’s sequence. This sequence shall

include technical details such as timers, delays, dead

bands, setpoints, interlocks, equations, detailed

description of control loops, description of alarm

details, and description of automatic response to

failure, etc. All assumptions and details required to

program the logic to meet the sequence of operation shall

be included.

12. Network configuration summary - Provide a comprehensive

spreadsheet showing all network devices and their

configuration parameters: BACnet address, IP addresses,

subnet mask, etc. Coordinate with owner as required but

contractor is responsible for documenting this

information.

13. Alarm list - A list of all alarms to be annunciated,

their description, the message text, local annunciation




method (alarm handler, popup window, etc.) their level of

importance / priority, delay time (e.g. alarm if

temperature is greater than X for Y seconds), and remote

annunciation method (SMS text, email, etc.). This

includes all wired or derived alarms and those monitored

via communication interface. See also requirements

listed in the BMS point list.

14. Samples for Initial Selection: For sensors installed in

public / finished spaces – if requested, the contractor

shall submit provide one of each type of sensor /

transmitter cover with factory-applied color finishes for

review / approval.


A. Provide an informational submittal of reference documentation

including information defined in this section. The package

shall be submitted to the owner within 30 days of being

contracted for this work.

B. Provide a complete and comprehensive submittal package

representing all required aspects of the system. Partial

submittals are not acceptable.

C. The submittal package includes the following requirements and

content:

1. Submit combined book-marked .pdf file format with

sections clearly delineated.

2. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that

each proposed DDC system component complies with

ASHRAE 135 (BACnet).

3. Coordinate paragraph below with qualification

requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" and

as supplemented in "Quality Assurance" Article.

4. Qualification Data: Provide qualifications for controls

integrator and hardware / software manufacturer including

company experience and similar project experience in the

past 5 years.

5. Examples of FAT, SAT, and other quality-control test

reports.

6. Examples of proposed operator displays / graphics (can be

similar graphics developed for similar projects).




1.13 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (O&MS)

A. At the completion of the project, contractor shall provide a

complete O&M manual to document engineering, operations, and

testing information.

B. Submit (3) hard copies of O&Ms in 3-ring binders and (1) set

of electronic versions. Electronic files shall include all

native software files as well as a combined and bookmarked

version in .pdf format. Contractor may submit electronic

versions only if approved by owner.

C. Update and include all information provided in the engineered

submittal package and include additional information described

in this section. In addition to items specified in the

general specification sections (Div. 0) include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts

2. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials

recommended, and calibration tolerances.

3. Calibration records and list of set points.

4. Warranty Summary - Provide a spreadsheet-formatted

document showing all purchased equipment, hardware,

software and components with associated vendor-provided

warranty durations and warranty start dates. Provide

vendor contact information and warranty statement

describing warranty details and terms for each product

provided.

5. As-built drawings – these include installation drawings

produced during the submittal phase and additional

drawings that were created, all updated to represent the

final state of the system installation. Include

locations of panels and devices, power circuit

information, cable routing, information, cable and device

labeling as required and other information to ensure a

complete and accurate set of documents that will provide

a useful tool for operations.

6. Programming logic – include electronic programming logic

files in native format and 11x17 printouts of all

programming logic. Represent as function block / object

programming whenever supported by the controller hardware

/ software.

7. Testing documentation

a. Include the following types of testing documentation

at a minimum:

1) Any NIST calibration records




2) Any SAT checklists and procedures and results

3) Any FAT checklists and procedures and results

4) Equipment Integration checkout sheets

5) Controller and field device point-to-point

checkout sheets (if separate from those listed

in this section)

6) Graphical point verification sheets

7) Alarm configuration and operation verification

sheets

8) Remote notification configuration and

verification sheets

9) Function testing (sequence of operation)

verification sheets

8. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

9. Program Software Backup: On portable USB digital storage

media or DVD-R disc.

10. Printout of graphic screens.

11. Printout / documentation of final setpoints and settings.

12. Software license information for DDC workstations and

control systems.

1.14 MAINTENANCE / OTHER MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products

installed and that are packaged with protective covering for

storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Space temperature sensor / thermostat cover (Allen) key

2. Control panel keys

3. Any other spare parts required under this section

B. Configuration Software: Provide all configuration software

(and any associated licensing) in addition to the core BMS

software provided to allow the owner to configure controllers,

make modifications to programming logic, perform backups, and

configure any and all portions of the installed system.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain all BAS components through one

source from a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified

or approved by the engineer.




B. Installer Qualifications: Only installation by a factory

approved integrator or dealer of the supplied control system

software and hardware shall be allowed.

C. All products and materials shall be standard and supported

products of the hardware manufacturer.

D. All products shall have been in commercial or industrial use

and available to the public for at least two (2) years prior

to being submitted for use on the project.

E. All products shall be fully supported by the manufacturer's

warranty which includes replacement, repairs, and updates in

accordance with their standard warranty language.

F. The contractor and all subcontractors supplying services on

this project shall have recent experience providing similar

products and installations as this project within the past (2)

years.

G. The programmer writing the software programming logic shall

have experience in developing similar programs as those

specified herein.

H. The contractor shall have an ability nationally (or in-place

support facility locally) to respond to a problem within

reasonable time. This shall include availability of technical

staff, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and

diagnostic equipment.

I. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and

labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and

marked for intended use.

J. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.

K. The design, manufacture, installation, testing, operation and

maintenance of the system shall be in compliance with the

latest issue of the applicable standards, codes, regulations

and recommended practices of governing agencies. All standards

and recommended practices of these agencies form a part of

this specification to the extent they are applicable to the

system and its components as specified herein.

L. The system must comply with the requirements of federal, state

and local authorities having jurisdiction. The officials of

the authorities may carry out inspections necessary to ensure

that the work is in compliance.




1.16 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most

restrictive of local, state, and federal authorities’ codes

and ordinances or these plans and specifications. As a

minimum, the installation shall comply with current editions

in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following

codes:

B. National Electric Code (NEC)

C. International Building Code/

D. International Energy Conservation Code.

E. International Mechanical Code.

F. Additional codes as listed on project drawings.

G. ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001: Data Communication Protocol for Building

Automation and Control systems (BACnet)

1.17 OWNER TRAINING

A. Provide customizable owner / operator training from a

qualified system engineer / technician familiar with this

scope of work.

B. Provide (16) hours of on-site owner / operator training. This

is likely to be provided in four-hour slots on non-consecutive

days but will be determined later.

C. Specific training curriculum and use of specified hours shall

be submitted to the owner for approval three weeks prior to

the proposed start of training.

D. At a minimum, the training should cover:

1. Products, architecture and locations / access

2. Walkthrough of all panels, components and instrumentation

3. Power metering devices and architecture (if applicable)

4. VFD menu navigation (settings related to this scope of

work)

5. System design and sequence of operation

6. Failure modes / system response

7. Trending and archiving

8. Graphical user interface




a. Rebooting PC, automatic logon, software as a service

b. Normal logon / logoff, user access and privileges

c. Remote system access

d. Display / screen navigation

e. Setpoint adjustment

f. Manual overrides

g. Making changes to graphics

h. Making changes to programming logic

i. Alarm management

j. Patches, updates schedule and process

9. Troubleshooting

10. Suggested routine maintenance

11. Smart Instrumentation interface review

12. Instrumentation calibration schedules

1.18 WARRANTY

A. Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free

from defects for a period of 24 months after final acceptance.

Control system failures during warranty period shall be

adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or

reduction in service to Owner. Respond during normal business

hours within 24 hours of Owner’s warranty service request.

B. Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner receives

beneficial use due to early system start-up. If specified work

is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase contract,

each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start

date and period.

C. If Engineer determines that equipment and systems operate

satisfactorily at the end of final start-up, testing, and

commissioning phase, Engineer will certify in writing that

control system operation has been tested and accepted in

accordance with the terms of this specification. Date of

acceptance shall begin warranty period.

D. Provide updates to operator workstation software, project-

specific software, graphic software, database software, and

firmware that resolve Contractor-identified software

deficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If

available, Owner can purchase in-warranty service agreement to

receive upgrades for functional enhancements associated with




above-mentioned items. Do not install updates or upgrades

without Owner’s written authorization.

E. Exception: Contractor shall not be required to warrant reused

devices except those that have been rebuilt or repaired.

Installation labor and materials shall be warranted.

Demonstrate operable condition of reused devices at time of

Engineer’s acceptance.

1.19 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. Project-specific software, licensing and documentation shall

become Owner’s property at final acceptance. This includes,

but is not limited to:

1. Graphics

2. Record drawings

3. Database

4. Documentation

5. Application programming code

6. BMS Configuration and programming software

7. Server and Workstation Operating System software and

licensing

8. Any other BMS software and licensing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use new products that the manufacturer is currently

manufacturing and that have been installed in a minimum of 25

installations. Do not use this installation as a product test

site unless explicitly approved in writing by Owner or Owner's

representative. Spare parts shall be available for at least

five years after completion of this contract.

2.2 COMMUNICATION

A. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters,

hubs, and routers shall comprise a BACnet internetwork.

Controller and operator interface communication shall conform

to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet.




B. Each controller shall have a communication port for connection

to an operator interface.

C. Internetwork / interbuilding operator interface and value

passing shall be transparent to internetwork architecture.

D. An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow

the operator to interface with each internetwork controller as

if directly connected. Controller information such as data,

status, reports, system software, and custom programs shall be

viewable and editable from each internetwork controller.

E. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate

control strategies across multiple controllers shall be

readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and

test all cross-controller links required to execute specified

control system operation. An authorized operator shall be able

to edit cross-controller links by typing a standard object

address.

F. System shall be expandable to at least twice the required

input and output objects with additional controllers,

associated devices, and wiring. Expansion shall not require

operator interface hardware additions or software revisions.

G. Workstations, Building Control Panels and Controllers with

real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization

service. The system shall automatically synchronize system

clocks daily from an operator-designated device via the

internetwork. The system shall automatically adjust for

daylight savings and standard time as applicable.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

Submitted manufacturers not listed in the acceptable

manufacturer list are not acceptable unless approved by the

project engineer.

2.4 DDC SYSTEM GENERAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturers include those that meet standards of

ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) and are BTL listed:

1. Honeywell.

2. Johnson Controls, Inc.




3. Schneider / TAC

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators,

actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other

apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed

controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment

on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical

systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the

network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical

system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by

point-and-click graphics.

2.5 BUILDING APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (BAC)

A. General. Provide an adequate number of BACs to achieve the

performance specified in the Part 1 Article on “System

Performance.” Each of these controllers shall meet the

following requirements.

1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one

or more independent, stand-alone, microprocessor-based

BACs to manage the global strategies described in the

System Software section.

2. BACs are synonymous with “system controllers” or “global

controllers.”

3. The building controller shall have sufficient memory to

support its operating system, database, and programming

requirements.

4. Data shall be shared between networked building

controllers.

5. The operating system of the building controller shall

manage the input and output communication signals to

allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual

object information and allow for central monitoring and

alarms.

6. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-

time clock.

7. The building controller shall continually check the

status of its processor and memory circuits. If an

abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:

a. Assume a predetermined failure mode,

b. Generate an alarm notification.

8. The Building Controller shall communicate with other

BACnet devices on the internetwork using the Read

(Execute and Initiate) and Write (Execute and Initiate)




Property services as defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.9,

respectively, of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004.

B. Communication

1. Each building controller shall reside on a BACnet network

using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer

protocol. Each building controller also shall perform

BACnet routing if connected to a network of custom

application and application specific controllers.

2. The controller shall provide a service communication port

using BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol for

connection to a portable operator’s terminal.

C. Environment

1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated

ambient conditions.

2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient

conditions shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures

and shall be rated for operation at 40°F to 150°F.

3. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in

dust-proof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at

0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).

D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power,

communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be

made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a

termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

E. Memory. The building controller shall maintain all BIOS and

programming information in the event of a power loss for at

least 72 hours.

F. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to

operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall

perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.

Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to

120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

2.6 INTEGRATION APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (IAC)

A. General. Provide an adequate number of IACs to achieve the




1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one

or more microprocessor-based IACs to manage the systems




integration functions of the BMS. The IAC combines

integrated control, supervision, data logging, alarming,

scheduling, and network management functions.

2. The IAC is designed to integrate to a variety of devices

and open and proprietary protocols to unified,

distributed systems. IAC functionality can be built into

a BAC or achieved via independent controllers suitable

for that purpose (varies by vendor).

3. The IAC shall have sufficient memory to support its

operating system, database, and programming requirements.

4. Data shall be shared between networked IACs.

5. The operating system of the IAC shall manage the input

and output communication signals to allow distributed

controllers to share real and virtual object information

and allow for central monitoring and alarms.

6. The IAC shall continually check the status of its

processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation

is detected, the controller shall:

a. Assume a predetermined failure mode,

b. Generate an alarm notification.

7. The IAC shall communicate with other devices on the

internetwork using the Read (Execute and Initiate) and

Write (Execute and Initiate) Property services as defined

in Clauses 15.5 and 15.9, respectively, of ANSI/ASHRAE

Standard 135-2004.

8. The IAC shall support multiple communication bus

interfaces including:

a. (2) Ethernet (RJ-45) ports

b. (1) RS-485 connection

c. (1) RS-232 port

d. (1) USB port

9. The IAC shall support optional communication expansion

boards in addition to the built in communication

interfaces to provide additional expansion.

B. Communication: All requirements for the BAC apply to the IAC

C. Environment: All requirements for the BAC apply to the IAC




2.7 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (CAC)

A. General. Provide an adequate number of CACs to achieve the




1. The CAC shall have sufficient memory to support its

operating system, database, and programming requirements.

2. Data shall be shared between networked custom application

controllers.

3. The operating system of the controller shall manage the

input and output communication signals to allow

distributed controllers to share real and virtual object

information and allow central monitoring and alarms.

4. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-

time clock.

5. The CAC shall continually check the status of its

processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation

is detected, the controller shall:

a. assume a predetermined failure mode and

b. generate an alarm notification.

6. The CAC shall communicate with other BACnet devices on

the internetwork using the Read (Execute and Initiate)

and Write (Execute and Initiate) Property services as

defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.9, respectively, of

ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004.

B. Communication

1. Each CAC shall reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP

Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

2. The controller shall provide a service communication port

using BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol for

connection to a portable operator’s terminal.

C. Environment

1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated

ambient conditions.



and shall be rated for operation at 40°C to 65°C ( 40°F

to 150°F).





dustproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at

0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).





E. Memory. The CAC shall maintain all BIOS and programming

information in the event of a power loss for at least 72

hours.

F. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to


perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.

Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to

120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

2.8 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC)

A. General. ASCs are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which

through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a

specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user-

programmable but are customized for operation within the

confines of the equipment they are designed to serve.

Application specific controllers shall communicate with other

BACnet devices on the internetwork using the Read (Execute)

Property service as defined in Clause 15.5 of ANSI/ASHRAE

Standard 135-2004.

1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and

shall continue to provide control functions without being

connected to the network.

2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control

the target system.

B. Communication

1. The controller shall reside on a BACnet network using the

MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol. Each network of

controllers shall be connected to one building

controller.

2. Each controller shall have a BACnet Data Link/Physical

layer compatible connection for a laptop computer or a

portable operator’s tool. This connection shall be

extended to a space temperature sensor port where shown.

C. Environment




1. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated

ambient conditions.



and shall be rated for operation at 40°C to 65°C ( 40°F

to 150°F).


dust-proof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at

0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).





E. Memory. The application specific controller shall use

nonvolatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming

information in the event of a power loss.

F. Immunity to power and noise. Controllers shall be able to


perform an orderly shutdown below 80%. Operation shall be

protected against electrical noise of 5-120 Hz and from keyed

radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

G. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at a

minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption and shall be of the

fused or current limiting type.

2.9 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. Furnish the following applications software for building and

energy management. All software applications shall reside and

operate in the system controllers. Editing of applications

shall occur at the operator workstation.

B. System Security

1. User access shall be secured using individual security

passwords and user names.

2. Passwords shall restrict the user to the objects,

applications, and system functions as assigned by the

system manager.

3. User Log On/Log Off attempts shall be recorded.

4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by

automatically logging off following the last keystroke.

The delay time shall be user-definable.




C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or

group of objects in the system. Each schedule shall consist of

the following:

1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day

of the week. Each of these schedules should include the

capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop,

and night economizer. Each schedule may consist of up to

10 events. When a group of objects are scheduled

together, provide the capability to adjust the start and

stop times for each member.

2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator

to designate any day of the year as an exception

schedule. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year

in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed, it

will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule

for that day of the week.

3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the

operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules.

These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar

and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be

able to define the length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination. Provide a standard application for the

proper coordination of equipment. This application shall

provide the operator with a method of grouping together

equipment based on function and location. This group may then

be used for scheduling and other applications.

E. Binary Alarms. Each binary object shall be set to alarm based

on the operator-specified state. Provide the capability to

automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms. Each analog object shall have both high and low

alarm limits. Alarming must be able to be automatically and

manually disabled.

G. Alarm Reporting. The operator shall be able to determine the

action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be

routed to the appropriate workstations based on time and other

conditions. An alarm shall be able to start programs, print,

be logged in the event log, generate custom messages, and

display graphics.

H. Sequencing. Provide application software based upon the

sequences of operation specified to properly sequence

chillers, boilers, and pumps.




I. PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative)

algorithm with direct or reverse action and anti-windup shall

be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying

analog value that is used to position an output or stage a

series of outputs. The controlled variable, set point, and PID

gains shall be user-selectable.

J. Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled

equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage.

The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is

started, along with the time delay between starts, shall be

user-selectable.

K. Energy Calculations.

1. Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g., kW)

or flow rates (e.g., L/s [gpm]) to be accumulated and

converted to energy usage data.

2. Provide an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window

average (e.g., rolling average). The algorithm shall be

flexible to allow window intervals to be user specified

(e.g., 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes).

3. Provide an algorithm that calculates a fixed-window

average. A digital input signal will define the start of

the window period (e.g., signal from utility meter) to

synchronize the fixed-window average with that used by

the utility.

L. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output objects shall be

protected from short cycling. This feature shall allow minimum

on-time and off-time to be selected.

M. On/Off Control with Differential. Provide an algorithm that

allows a binary output to be cycled based on a controlled

variable and set point. The algorithm shall be direct-acting

or reverse-acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.

N. Run-Time Totalization. Provide software to totalize run-times

for all equipment and motors. A high run-time alarm shall be

created and annunciated with the operator-adjustable run-time

alarm setpoints and reset functionality.

2.10 CONTROLLER INPUT / OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through

building, custom application, or application specific

controllers.




B. All input points and output points shall be protected such

that shorting of the point to itself, to another point, or to

ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and

output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of

any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause

no damage to the controller.

C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of On/Off signals

from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting

current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly

available control devices and shall be protected against the

effects of contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense

“dry contact” closure without external power (other than that

provided by the controller) being applied.

D. Pulse accumulation input objects. This type of object shall

conform to all the requirements of binary input objects and

also accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation.

E. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low-voltage (0 to

10 VDC), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals

(thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with —

and field configurable to — commonly available sensing

devices.

F. Binary outputs shall provide for On/Off operation or a pulsed

low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary

outputs on building and custom application controllers shall

have three-position (On/Off/Auto) override switches and status

lights. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open

or normally closed operation.

G. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the

control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10

VDC or a 4 to 20 mA signal as required to provide proper

control of the output device. Analog outputs on building or

custom application controllers shall have status lights and a

two-position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch and manually adjustable

potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs shall not

exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4% of range per year.

H. Tri-State Outputs. Provide tri-state outputs (two coordinated

binary outputs) for control of three-point floating type

electronic actuators without feedback. Use of three-point

floating devices shall be limited to zone control and terminal

unit control applications (VAV terminal units, duct-mounted

heating coils, zone dampers, radiation, etc.). Control

algorithms shall run the zone actuator to one end of its




stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator

tracking.

I. Input / Output points shall be the universal type, i.e.,

controller input or output may be designated (in software) as

either a binary or analog type point with appropriate

properties. Application specific controllers are exempted from

this requirement.

J. System Object Capacity. The system size shall be expandable to

at least twice the number of input/ output objects required

for this project. Additional controllers (along with

associated devices and wiring) shall be all that is necessary

to achieve this capacity requirement. The operator interfaces

installed for this project shall not require any hardware

additions or software revisions in order to expand the system.

2.11 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

A. AC Control Transformers

1. Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2

current-limiting type or furnish over-current protection

in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2

service in accordance with NEC requirements. Limit

connected loads to 80% of rated capacity.

B. DC Power Supplies

1. DC power supply output shall match output current and

voltage requirements. Unit shall be full-wave rectifier

type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak.

Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with

100-microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit

shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current

protection and shall be able to withstand a 150% current

overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or

failure.

2. Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F).

EM/RF shall meet FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and

MIL-STD 810C for shock and vibration.

3. Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA

approved.

C. Power Line Filtering

1. Provide transient voltage and surge suppression for all

workstations and controllers either internally or as an




external component. Surge protection shall have the

following at a minimum:

a. Dielectric strength of 1000 volts minimum

b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less

c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or

greater

d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or better at

40 Hz to 100 Hz

2.12 CONTROL PANELS / ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosures: Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Adalet.

2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

3. EGS/Appleton Electric.

4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

5. FSR Inc.

6. Hoffman.

7. Hubbell Incorporated.

8. Kraloy.

9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.

10. Mono-Systems, Inc.

11. O-Z/Gedney.

12. RACO; Hubbell.

13. Rittal

14. Robroy Industries.

15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

16. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.

17. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

18. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. For outdoor or locations prone to water, provide painted steel

NEMA 4 rated enclosures with continuous hinge, minimum 16

gauge

C. For indoor or general indoor locations, provide NEMA 1 rated

enclosures with continuous hinge, minimum 16 gauge.




D. Control panels shall be built with quality components and

organized to support efficient installation, troubleshooting

and operations.

E. Engineered Control Panels shall be built by a certified UL 508

panel shop.

F. Provide din rail power disconnect switches inside the panel to

isolate 24Vac or 120Vac feed.

G. Maximum incoming voltage shall be 120Vac.

H. For critical applications, provide redundant AC transformers

and redundant DC power supplies with automatic switching

modules and annunciation to BMS of failure.

I. Provide appropriate isolation of high and low voltage

components and cabling per code.

J. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices

shall be prewired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly

installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for

field connections shall be UL listed for 600 volt service,

individually identified per control/ interlock drawings, with

adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for

field connection shall be individually identified per control

drawings.

K. Control relays shall be integral to the controller or din rail

mount with indicator lights and maintained manual overrides.

L. Utilize circuit breakers rated and configured for the

appropriate application instead of plain fuses. Where fuses

are best for the application, provide blown fuse indication in

fuse terminal blocks / holders.

M. Clearly label all controller I/O, cabling, and devices in the

panel to match material tags on the installation drawings.

N. Provide covered wire duct for cable management.

O. Provide control panel wiring diagrams inside the panel.

P. Provide enclosure lock assembly with spare keys.

Q. Provide ventilation louvers and fans when appropriate to

dissipate heat.

R. Provide current protected 120Vac convenience receptacle in

control panel for charging operator laptop. Provide




sufficient labeling to indicate it shall not be used for any

other purpose.

S. Requirements specified in section 260533: “Raceways and Boxes

for Electrical Systems” also apply to this section.

T. Terminal blocks shall be screw type only, no push down type.

Use tightening torques recommended by the manufacturer.

2.13 NETWORK SWITCHES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. MOXA

2. Ethernet Direct Husky Series

3. Sixnet

4. Contemporary Controls

B. Ethernet / fiber network switches shall be din-rail mount,

100Mbps industrial quality rated for panel mounting. Basis of

design is MOXA EDS-205/208 series.

C. Provide appropriate models with 100BaseFX fiber / 100BaseT(x)

copper ports as required to meet cabling / length restrictions

and as shown on construction drawings.

D. Utilize switches with 1Gbps ports when required for sufficient

bandwidth / throughput. Distinguish Ethernet switch type and

maximum segment bandwidth on system architecture diagram.

E. Ensure all switches have sufficient spare port capacity for

expansion and operator / technician connection to the BMS

network.

F. Integral broadcast storm protection.

G. -10 to 60°C operating temperature range.

H. Retail / consumer-quality Ethernet switches not designed for

control panel installation and commercial building and

mechanical room environments are not allowed.

2.14 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)


1. Phoenix Contact QUINT

2. Siemens SITOP




3. Eaton Powerware

4. SOLA Heavy Duty

B. All critical control panels and associated field devices shall

be protected by a UPS. UPS shall be offline type and sized

for at least (60) minutes of battery backup.

C. UPS shall be installed upstream of control system programmable

DDC controllers, I/O cards or modules, network switches or

other communication devices, and instrumentation so that the

control system and all normal visibility remains active during

generator transfer and other power anomalies.

D. UPS shall be din-rail mount or panel mount with appropriate

mounting lugs for the purpose.

E. Provide alarming of “on battery,” “low battery,” and “UPS

alarm” conditions to the BMS.

2.15 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The level of monitoring granularity will be typical for a

commercial facility.

B. Instrumentation accuracy and quality are defined by the Sensor

Accuracy / Grade Summary Matrix

C. Refer to piping and controls schematics for additional

information.

D. Instrumentation Grade requirements for this project are

[DEFINED BELOW / DEFINED IN THE BMS POINT AND ALARM MATRIX]:

1. Temperature = Grade B

2. Wet Pressure = Grade C

3. Air Pressure = Grade C

4. Humidity = Grade D

5. Flow = Grade D

E. Provide instrumentation required by the project documents and

sequences of operation and BMS point lists.

F. Grade A and B sensors shall include a LCD display unless

stated otherwise.

G. Accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor,

lead wires, analog to digital conversion, transmitter error,




and errors related to shunt resistors required for 4-20mA

inputs.

H. 4-20mA input circuits shall require precision resistors with

tolerance better than 0.1% or as described to meet the

requirements in the matrix.

I. Sensor + transmitter components shall be factory-calibrated as

an assembly where indicated.




Sen

sor A

ccuracy / G

rade

Sum

mary M

atrix

Ap

plicatio

nG

rade

AG

rade

BG

rade

CG

rade

D

Techn

olo

gyA

ccuracy

Co

stTech

no

logy

Accu

racyC

ost

Techn

olo

gyA

ccuracy

Co

stTech

no

logy

Accu

racyC

ost

TEMP

ERA

TUR

E

Ro

om

,

Imm

ersion

,

Du

ct, Ou

tside

Air

Precisio

n

Transm

itter

with

Grad

e A

RTD

(Match

ed) +

Precisio

n

Shu

nt

Resisto

r

± 0.1

5°F

Acro

ss

Span

4X

+

Transm

itter

with

Grad

e A

RTD

(2- P

oin

t

Calib

ration

) +

Precisio

n

Shu

nt

Resisto

r

± 0.3

°F

Acro

ss

Span

2X

Precisio

n

Therm

istor

± 0.1

8°F

(32

-

15

8°F)

0.5

X

Co

mm

ercial

Transm

itter

with

Grad

e B

RTD

(Un

match

ed)

± 1°F

Acro

ss

Span

X

PR

ESSUR

E

Wet Flu

id

Differen

tialP

iezoresistive

± 0.0

75

%

Span

7X

+Silico

n crystal

± 0.2

5 -

0.5

%

Span

4X

Mech

anical

Diap

hragm

± 1 - 2

%

Span

2X

Mech

anical

Diap

hragm

± 3%

Span

X

Air Static /

Differen

tialP

iezoresistive

± 0.0

75

%

Span

7X

+Silico

n crystal

± 0.2

5 -

0.5

%

Span

4X

Mech

anical

Diap

hragm

± 1%

Span

2X

Mech

anical

Diap

hragm

± 2%

Span

X

HU

MID

ITY

Space, D

uct

Ch

illed M

irror

< 1%

RH

10

X+

Cap

acitive

Thin

Film

Po

lymer

± 1 - 2

%

RH

3X

Cap

acitive

Thin

Film

Po

lymer

± 2%

RH

2X

Cap

acitive

Thin

Film

Po

lymer

± 3%

RH

X

FLOW

Fluid

(Pip

e)

Inlin

e Electro-

magn

etic

Tub

e +

Transm

itter

± 0.2

%

Span

6X

+

Insertio

n

Electrom

ag-

netic

± 1%

No

rmal

Velo

city

Ran

ge

2.5

XIn

sertion

Turb

ine

± 2%

No

rmal

Velo

city

Ran

ge

2X

Pito

t Tub

e +

Qu

ality DP

Transm

itter

± 3-5

%

Span

X




2.16 TEMPERATURE SENSORS / RTDS / TRANSMITTERS

A. This section applies to all temperature sensing devices and

transmitter assemblies. Refer to the accuracy / grade matrix

and grade requirement section to determine the required

technology for this project.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

2. Automation Components, Inc. (ACI)

3. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

4. Veris Industries

5. BAPI

6. Johnson Controls

7. Precon

8. Minco

9. Pyromation

10. Honeywell

11. Emerson Rosemount

C. General Requirements:

1. Sensing element and transmitter shall be mounted as close

as possible. Provide remote transmitter where required

for operator access and maintenance.

2. RTDs and transmitter assemblies (Grade A and B) shall

allow for field calibration and adjustment.

3. Refer to the accuracy / grade matrix for additional

details.

D. Immersion Temperature Sensors:

1. For pipes greater than 3 in OD, provide stainless-steel

thermowell installed perpendicular to flow.

2. For pipes less than 3 in OD, provide stainless-steel

thermowell installed in elbow with minimum thermowell

length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

3. Thermowells should be stainless steel and sized such that

the insertion of the thermowell into the pipe is equal to

approximately one-third of the internal pipe diameter.

4. Provide heat transfer compound between sensing probe and

thermowell as recommended by the manufacturer




5. RTD probe shall be stainless steel, one-piece

construction and include threaded connection to

transmitter housing (no nylon thread adapters).

E. Room Temperature Sensors:

1. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or

wall box mounting.

2. Room sensors shall have the following:

a. Fixed, non-adjustable display / cover in public

locations

b. Heating / Cooling Setpoint adjustment

1) Local setpoint adjustment shall apply to the

occupied heating and cooling setpoint only

2) Setpoint adjustment will increase / decrease

both heating and cooling setpoints together

while maintaining the EMS configured dead band

(initially 4 deg F)

3) Setpoint adjustment required for the following

equipment:

a) VAV terminal units

b) Chilled Beams

c) Fan Coil Units

c. Setpoint adjustment can be enabled and range and

offsets configured at BMS front end

d. Provide momentary override request push button for

activation of after-hours operation for the

following equipment:

1) VAV terminal units

2) Chilled Beams

3) Fan Coil Units

4) Enable / disable and number of associated zones

for override button shall be configurable in

EMS software

F. Duct Mount Sensors:

1. Duct mounted sensors shall be mounted in an electrical

box through a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to

be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

2. Duct mounted sensors shall be insertion type and

constructed as a complete assembly including lock nut and

mounting plate.




3. For outdoor duct applications, a weatherproof mounting

box with weatherproof cover and gasket shall be used.

G. Outdoor Air Temperature:

1. Temperature sensors for outdoor applications shall meet

requirements in this section and these additional

requirements:

a. Watertight enclosure (NEMA 4+)

b. UV-resistant housing

c. Protective ventilated shield to protect sensor from

direct sunlight and precipitation

d. One single outdoor air temperature sensor shall be

referenced by the EMS for all HVAC equipment

sequences.

2.17 FLUID WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Veris Industries

2. Setra

3. Dwyer

4. Mamac

5. Ashcroft

6. Honeywell

7. Endress + Hauser

8. Emerson / Rosemount

B. Transmitter: LCD display, linear 4-20mA output, configurable

via local LCD display or HART-equivalent configuration tool.

C. Housing: Painted Aluminum

D. Range

1. System CHWS/R Differential Pressure: 0-25 psid

2. System HWS/R Differential Pressure: 0-25 psid

3. Heat Exchanger Differential Pressure: 0-10 psid

4. Control Valve Pressure: 0-20 psid

E. Accuracy: see matrix

F. Calibration: factory




G. Wetted Parts: 316 SS

H. Installation: Provide 5-valve manifold assembly and any

additional mounting hardware

2.18 WATER FLOW METER / TRANSMITTER

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Onicon Incorporated

2. Honeywell

3. Endress + Hauser

4. Emerson / Rosemount

5. Siemens

6. Johnson Controls Inc

B. Transmitter: 4-20mA output, isolated

C. Housing: Painted Aluminum

D. Range

1. System HWR Flow: 0-XXX gpm.

2. Steam Flow: 0-XXX pph.

E. Accuracy: see matrix

F. Calibration: factory, a certificate of calibration shall be

provided with each flow meter.

G. Wetted Parts: 316 SS

H. Insertion Type

1. Provide factory hot tap installation kit or appropriate

ball valve and piping connections to allow insertion and

removal of the meter without special tools or disrupting

flow

2. Coordinate location to ensure manufacturer recommended

upstream and downstream straight run requirements are

achieved.

I. Inline Type

1. Coordinate location to ensure manufacturer recommended

upstream and downstream straight run requirements are

achieved.




2. Where flow meter body is installed in an inaccessible

area, provide remote mounted transmitter.

2.19 AIR PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS / TRANSDUCERS


1. BEC Controls Corporation.

2. General Eastern Instruments.

3. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

4. TCS/Basys Controls.

5. Air Monitor Corporation

6. Paragon Controls

7. Tek-Air Systems, Inc.

8. BAPI

9. Dwyer

10. Setra

11. Veris Industries

B. Accuracy: see matrix

C. Output: 4-20mA, 0-10Vdc, field selectable

D. Space Static-Pressure Range: -0.25 to +0.25 inch wg,

Bidirectional.

E. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0-5 inch wg, Unidirectional.

F. Air flow Probe DP measurement: selection based on air flow

measurement device specifications and flow velocity.

G. Circuit protection: isolated power, reverse polarity

protection

H. Power supply: 24VAC / VDC

I. Multi point temperature compensation

J. Calibration:

1. Span and Zero Adjustment via digital display or protected

pushbuttons.

2. Factory calibrated initially









3. Provide calibration of airflow probe and pressure

transmitter when using individual components as an

assembly.

K. Installation:

1. 1/4” brass barb or compression fittings

2. Locate in accessible area but protected from public

access.

3. Transmitters with LCD displays must be mounted at Eye

level and visible to operators.

L. Provide sensor accessories where required:

1. Pitot tubes

2. Space pressure references

3. Outdoor air pressure references

4. Guards: Metal wire, tamperproof, Locking in areas

susceptible to physical damage

5. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover

screws.

2.20 HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS


1. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp

2. Vaisala

B. Accuracy: See Matrix

C. Output: 4-20mA, 0-10Vdc

D. The sensor shall be a solid-state type, relative humidity

sensor of the Bulk Polymer Design. The sensor element shall

resist service contamination.

E. The humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-

interactive span and zero adjustments, a 2-wire isolated loop

powered, 4-20 mA, 0-100% linear proportional output.

Transmitters with LCD display shall allow field adjustments

and calibration via the LCD display.

F. Range: 0 - 100% RH non-condensing

G. Calibration: Sensor / Transmitter shall support field

calibration. Provide tools / kit required for field






recalibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-

calibrated.

H. Duct mounted sensing probes shall be constructed of a type 304

stainless steel and shall be equipped with a neoprene grommet,

bushings, and a mounting bracket.

I. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity:

1. Humidity sensors for outdoor applications shall meet


requirements:

2. Watertight enclosure (NEMA 4+)

3. UV-resistant housing

4. Protective ventilated shield to protect sensor from


5. One single relative humidity sensor shall be referenced

by the BMS for all HVAC equipment sequences.

2.21 COMBINATION HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS


1. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp

2. Vaisala



D. Humidity

1. The sensor shall be a solid-state type, relative humidity

sensor of the Bulk Polymer Design. The sensor element

shall resist service contamination.

2. The humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-

interactive span and zero adjustments, a 2-wire isolated

loop powered, 4-20 mA, 0-100% linear proportional output.

Transmitters with LCD display shall allow field

adjustments and calibration via the LCD display.

3. Range: 0 - 100% RH non-condensing

4. Calibration: Sensor / Transmitter shall support field

calibration. Provide tools / kit required for field

recalibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-

calibrated.






5. Duct mounted sensing probes shall be constructed of a

type 304 stainless steel and shall be equipped with a

neoprene grommet, bushings, and a mounting bracket.

6. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity:

a. Humidity sensors for outdoor applications shall meet


requirements:

b. Watertight enclosure (NEMA 4+)

c. UV-resistant housing

d. Protective ventilated shield to protect sensor from


e. One single relative humidity sensor shall be

referenced by the BMS for all HVAC equipment

sequences.

E. Temperature

1. [option 1] The sensor shall be resistive sensor element

such as RTD or thermistor. Refer to requirements in

temperature sensor section.

2. [option 2] The sensor shall be RTD element with matched

temperature transmitter providing 4-20mA or 0-10vdc

output to BMS. Refer to requirements in temperature

sensor section.

2.22 CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) TRANSMITTER


1. GE / Teleaire

2. BAPI

3. Dwyer

4. Veris Industries

5. Schneider Electric

6. Vaisala

7. Rotronic

B. Accuracy: see matrix


D. Range: 0-2000 ppm, 0-5000 ppm, field-selectable





E. Sensor Type: Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR), diffusion

sampling

F. Circuit protection: isolated power, reverse polarity

protection

G. Power supply: 24VAC / VDC

H. Housing: ABS Plastic

I. Calibration:

1. ABC Calibration Algorithm: Automatic Baseline Calibration

is a self-calibration feature that automatically adjusts

the CO2 sensor to compensate for drift. When ABC is

enabled, the sensor records the lowest reading within

every 24-hour interval and compares these values over a

running 7-day or 28-day period.

2. Required for applications where there is an unoccupied

period within a 24-hour timeframe.

3. Sensor shall be capable of field calibration. Provide

calibration kit with appropriate calibration gases and

accessories.

J. Duct-Mounted CO2 Sensor:

1. Duct sensors shall have duct probe assembly and

compatible housing

2. LCD Display in non-public locations

3. Mount in accessible location where LCD can be easily read

by operators

K. Wall-Mounted CO2 Sensors:

1. Room sensors shall be compatible with surface mounting.

2. Room sensors shall have the following:

a. LCD Display in non-public locations

b. Fixed, non-adjustable display / cover in public

locations

3. Comply with installation height requirements for

temperature sensors

2.23 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATION


1. Ebtron





2. Johnson Controls

3. Air Monitor Corporation

4. Paragon Controls


C. Analog Output: 4-20mA, 0-10Vdc

D. Communication Output: BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU (field

selectable)

E. Duct and Plenum Application

1. Range: 0-5,000 fpm

2. Number of supported probes: 4

3. Basis of Design: Ebtron Advantage II Gold Series

F. Fan Inlet Application

1. Range: 0-10,000 fpm

2. Number of possible probes: 4 (dual inlet)

3. Basis of Design: Ebtron Advantage II Gold Series

G. Sensor Probes

1. Provide necessary probes (and corresponding transmitter /

station) required for the application

2. Material: anodized aluminum

H. Transmitters

1. Material: aluminum

2. LCD Display and user-configurable

3. Filtering / Dampening: 0-99%, field adjustable

4. Airflow low limit cutoff: field adjustable

I. Calibration

1. Sensor probes and transmitter shall be factory-calibrated

as a complete assembly

2.24 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Binary Temperature Devices

1. Low-voltage space thermostat shall be 24 V, bimetal-

operated, mercury-switch type, with either adjustable or

fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment,




13°C to 30°C (55°F to 85°F) set point range, 1°C (2°F)

maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

2. Line-voltage space thermostat shall be bimetal-actuated,

open contact type, or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-

switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat

anticipator, UL listed for electrical rating, concealed

setpoint adjustment, 13°C to 30°C (55°F to 85°F) setpoint

range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS

plastic cover.

B. Low-limit thermostats. Low-limit airstream (freeze)

thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type, with an

element of 6 m (20 ft) minimum length. Element shall respond

to the lowest temperature sensed by any 30 cm (1 ft) section.

The low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

C. Flow switches

1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or

differential pressure type, as shown.

2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL

listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA

minimum) and shall have adjustable sensitivity with NEMA

1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water

service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty

rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure, with scale

range and differential suitable for intended application

or as specified.

D. Relays

1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust

cover, LED “energized” indicator, maintained manual

override switch. Contact rating, configuration, and coil

voltage shall be suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in

type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be

adjustable ±200% (minimum) from set point shown on plans.

Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be

suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure when

not installed in local control panel.

3. Provide relays for isolation whenever interfacing with

packaged equipment or equipment with a conventional

thermostat interface.

E. Override timers




1. Override timers shall be spring-wound line voltage, UL

Listed, with contact rating and configuration as required

by application. Provide 0-to-6-hour calibrated dial

unless otherwise specified. Timer shall be suitable for

flush mounting on control panel face and located on local

control panels or where shown.

F. Current transducer / transmitters

1. AC current transmitters shall be the self-powered,

combination split-core current transformer type with

built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4

to 20 mA two-wire output. Unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20

A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A full scale, with

internal zero and span adjustment.

2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1

requirements and shall be UL/CSA Recognized.

3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation

on existing wiring.

4. Accuracy: ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

5. Output: 4-20mA two-wire output

G. Current transformers (CTs)

1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA Recognized and

completely encased (except for terminals) in approved

plastic material.

2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios

and shall be selected for ±1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale

output.

3. Accuracy: 1% from 10% to 100% of rated current

4. Output: 0.333V, 1V compatible with power meter

5. Transformers shall split-core type for installation on

new or existing wiring.

H. Current Status Switches

1. Current switches shall have adjustable trip setpoint for

motor belt applications.

2. Current switches shall be split-core type for

installation on new or existing wiring.

3. Switch selection shall have low “turn-on” current rating

sized for appropriate motor current.

4. Output: Normally open, 1A % 30Vac, Vdc

I. Microprocessor-based Variable Frequency Current Transformer




1. The current sensor shall be capable of detecting motor

belt or coupling loss when mounted on the load side of

variable frequency drives

2. The current sensor shall be factory programmed to detect

motor undercurrent situations (belt or coupling loss) on

variable or constant volume loads with no calibration

required.

3. The current sensor shall provide visual indication (LED)

for sensor, and relay status

4. The current sensor shall store the motor current

operating parameters in non-volatile memory

5. The current sensor shall have a push button reset to

clear the memory if the operating parameters change or

the sensor is moved to another load

6. The current sensor shall be self-calibrating and provide

positive status indication of electrical loads from 5 to

135 A

7. The current sensor shall be capable of operating in

frequencies from 12 to 115 Hz.

8. The current sensor output shall be N.O., Solid State, 0.1

A @ 30 VAC/DC

9. Basis of Design: Veris Industries Hawkeye model H614

J. Voltage transmitters

1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop

(two-wire) type, 4 to 20 mA output with zero and span

adjustment.

2. Ranges shall include 100 to 130 VAC, 200 to 250 VAC, 250

to 330 VAC, and 400 to 600 VAC full-scale, adjustable,

with ±1% full-scale accuracy with 500 ohm maximum burden.

3. Transmitters shall be UL/CSA Recognized at 600 VAC rating

and meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements.

K. Voltage transformers

1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA Recognized, 600

VAC rated, complete with built-in circuit breaker

protection.

2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures

of 4°C to 55°C (40°F to 130°F) and shall provide ±0.5%

accuracy at 24 VAC and a 5 VA load.

3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely

enclosed with metal or plastic material.




L. Differential Pressure Switch

1. Differential pressure type switches (air or water

service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty

rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure, with scale

range and differential suitable for intended application

or as shown.

2.25 CONTROL VALVES

A. Automated Butterfly Valves

1. Application: Equipment isolation, 2-position (NPS 2 and

larger)

2. The valve body shall be one-piece lug design with

extended neck to allow for 2” of piping insulation flange

hole drilling per international flange standards and be

provided with a non-corrosive bushing and self-adjusting

stem seal.

3. Flange locating holes shall be provided on wafer bodies

to allow for quick and precise alignment during valve

installation.

4. The valve disc edge and hub on metal discs shall be

spherically machined and hand polished for minimum torque

and maximum sealing capability. The disc-to-stem

connection shall be an internal double “D” design with no

possible leak paths in the disc-to-stem connection.

5. External disc-to-stem connections such as screws or pins

are not allowed. The valve stem shall be one-piece

design and be mechanically retained in the body neck and

no part of the stem shall be exposed to the line media.

6. The valve seat shall be a tongue-and groove design with a

primary hub seal and a molded flange O-ring suitable for

weld-neck and slip-on flanges.

7. The seat shall totally encapsulate the body isolating the

body from the line media and no flange gaskets shall be

required.

8. The lug valve shall be rated for bubble-tight shut-off

for bidirectional service to 175 psi (12.0 Bar) on sizes

2”-12” (50mm-300mm) and to 150 psi (10.3 Bar) on sizes

14”-20” (350mm-500mm).

9. The valve shall be tested for tight shut-off to 110% of

the rated pressure.

10. Sizing: Line size

11. Acceptable Manufacturers




a. Johnson Controls

b. Siemens

c. Honeywell

d. Bray International

e. Belimo Aircontrols

f. Griswold

g. Tyco

h. Keystone

i. Jamesbury / Metso

j. Flowserve

B. Characterized Control Valve

1. Application: Modulating service

2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Nickel-plated forged brass body rated

at no less than 400 psi, stainless steel ball and blowout

proof stem, female NPT end fittings, with a dual EPDM O-

ring packing design, fiberglass reinforced Teflon seats,

and a TEFZEL flow characterizing disc.

3. NPS 2-1/2 through 6: GG25 cast iron body according to

ANSI Class 125, standard class B, stainless steel ball

and blowout proof stem, flange to match ANSI 125 with a

dual EPDM O-ring package design, PTFE seats, and a

stainless steel flow characterizing disc.

4. Sizing: 3-psig (21-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design

flow rate or the following:

a. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified

above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is

more.

b. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop,

but not more than value specified above.

5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal

percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have

linear characteristics. Valves not serving a coil

application but used for mixing / diverting shall have

linear characteristics.

6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of

actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off

pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump)

head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure

differential across valve or 100 percent of total system

(pump) head.





a. Johnson Controls

b. Siemens

c. Honeywell



f. Griswold

C. Zone Valves

1. Application: On / Off, Two-position control

2. NPS 1 and Smaller: Forged brass body rated at no less

than 300 psi, stainless steel stems, female, NPT union or

sweat with a stainless steel stem and EPDM seals.

3. The manufacturer shall warrant all components for a

period of 2 years from the date of production.


a. Johnson Controls

b. Siemens

c. Honeywell



f. Griswold

2.26 ACTUATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic.

B. Electronic Damper Actuators:

1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Johnson Controls

b. Siemens

c. Belimo Aircontrols

d. Bray Commercial

2. Electronic damper actuators shall be the direct shaft

mounted type, V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

3. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided

where indicated in the sequence of operations. Damper




sections shall be sized based on the actuator

manufacturer’s recommendations for face velocity,

differential pressure and damper type.

4. All modulating actuators shall be provided with analog 4-

20mA or 0-10Vdc feedback signal. All two-position

actuators shall be provided with open and closed end

switches.

5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq.

Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and

breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.:

Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

7. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-

lb/sq. ft. of damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq.

ft. of damper.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-

lb/sq. ft of damper.

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-

lb/sq. ft. of damper.

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or

Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm: Increase

running torque by 1.5.

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or

Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm: Increase

running torque by 2.0.

8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital

rotation-sensing circuitry.

9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return

mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on

nonspring-return actuators.

10. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): [24] or

[120] Vac.

11. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V

ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.

12. Proportional Signal: 2-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA, and 2-10 Vdc

or 4-20 mA position feedback signal.

13. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122°F (Minus 30 to

plus 50°C)




14. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus

250°F (Minus 30 to plus 121°C).

15. Run Time: 60 to 120 seconds

16. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return

feature shall permit normally open or normally closed

positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators

(except terminal units) shall be furnished with

mechanical spring return unless otherwise specified in

the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have

external adjustable stops to limit the travel in both

direction, and a gear release to allow manual

positioning.

17. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power

supply, consume no more than 15 VA, and be UL listed. The

control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, and the

actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal

of 2-10 VDC.

18. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input

signal and may be used to parallel other actuators and

provide true position indication. The feedback signal of

one damper actuator for each separately controlled damper

shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control

panel for trouble-shooting purposes.

19. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or

120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Isolation, smoke,

exhaust fan, and other dampers, as specified in the

sequence of operations, shall be furnished with

adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position

or be hard wired to start/stop associated fan.

20. Two-position actuators, as specified in sequences of

operations as “quick acting,” shall move full stroke

within 20 seconds. All fire smoke damper or smoke damper

actuators shall be quick acting.

C. Electronic Valve Actuators:

1. Electronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the

valve manufacturer.

2. Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry

incorporated in its design to prevent damage to the

actuator.

3. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided

as required by the sequence of operations. Actuators

shall provide the minimum torque required for proper

valve close-off against the system pressure for the

required application. The valve actuator shall be sized




based on the valve manufacturer’s recommendations for

flow and pressure differential.

4. All actuators shall fail in the last position unless

specified with mechanical spring return in the sequence

of operations. The spring return feature shall permit

normally open or normally closed positions of the valves,

as required.

5. All direct shaft mount rotational actuators shall have

external adjustable stops to limit travel in either

direction.

6. Modulating Actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC and 120

VAC power supply and be UL listed. The control signal

shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA and the actuator shall

provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC.

7. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input

signal, and may be used to parallel other actuators and

provide true position indication. The feedback signal of

each valve actuator (except terminal unit valves) shall

be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel

for trouble-shooting purposes.

8. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or

120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Butterfly

isolation and other valves, as specified in the sequence

of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end

switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard

wired to start/stop the associated equipment.

D. Butterfly Valve Actuators

1. Acceptable manufacturers

a. Johnson Controls

b. Siemens

c. Belimo SY Series

d. Bray Series 70

e. Tyco / Keystone

f. Flowserve

2. The actuator shall be designed for 90° operation, provide

easy access for field wiring and built to withstand line

vibration and shock without failure.

3. The enclosure shall be die-cast aluminum with polyester

or Seacorr coating (as specified), provided with captive

cover bolts, have two (2) conduit connections (one for

power, one for control)




4. Include high visibility valve position display indicator

on the actuator

5. The motor shall be single phase, permanent split

capacitor reversible induction type with Class “F”

insulation, contain a built-in UL approved automatic

reset thermal overload protector set at 275° F (135°C)

and shall be 24 VAC, 120 VAC or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz as

specified.

6. Duty cycle shall be 25% for 2-position operation and 100%

for continuous operation.

7. The actuator shall have a self-locking gear train system

consisting of a worm and worm gear output drive mechanism

which will hold the valve in position without the need

for electro-mechanical braking system.

8. Mechanical stainless steel travel stops and lock nuts

shall be provided outside the actuator enclosure for ease

of adjustment and shall limit travel of the actuator in

either direction.

9. A manual override hand wheel shall be provided to rotate

the valve without electrical power and shall be operated

without the use of extra tools or levers.

10. Supply manual control wheel complete with chain assembly

for actuators mounted 7 ft. A.F.F.

11. An automatic power cut-out switch shall be provided to

cut power to the actuator when the manual override is

engaged.

12. Travel switches shall be SPDT Form C type, UL listed and

CSA approved, 10A at 125/250 VAC and 1/2A at 125 VDC,

pre-wired to a terminal block for ease of access and

limit actuator travel in both directions.

13. The cams for the travel switches shall be infinitely

adjustable by finger touch or screw driver.

14. All actuators shall mount directly to the valve mounting

flange and stem without the need for any brackets or

couplings.

15. Provide factory actuator options for modulating service

16. Provide open and closed end switches where indicated for

BMS monitoring

17. Provide actuator condensate heater

18. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4 / 4X or equivalent




2.27 CONTROL CABLES

A. Provide cabling according to BMS system manufacturer’s

specifications in addition to the requirements in this

section.

B. PVC-Jacketed, RS-232 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG,

stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene

insulation, and individual aluminum foil-polyester tape

shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage; PVC jacket.

Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded

(7x32) tinned copper drain wire.

1. NFPA 70, Type CM.

2. Flame Resistance: UL 1581, Vertical Tray.

C. Plenum-Type, RS-232 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG,

stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, plastic insulation,

and individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs

with 100 percent shield coverage; plastic jacket. Pairs are

cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned

copper drain wire.

1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.

2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

D. PVC-Jacketed, RS-485 Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG,

stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, low capacitance, PVC

insulation, shielded, PVC jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMG.

E. Plenum-Type, RS-485 Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG,

stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, low capacitance,

fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, shielded, and

fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMP.

F. Ethernet Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables: Category 5e or

better as specified for horizontal cable for data service.

2.28 INSTRUMENT WET PRESSURE TUBING

A. For wet differential pressure transmitters, provide pressure

tubing between process and instruments using hard drawn copper

instrument tubing and compression fittings.

B. Isolation, equalization, vent, and bleed valves and

specialties provided by others. Coordinate requirements with

other trades prior to installation.




2.29 INSTRUMENT AIR PRESSURE TUBING

A. For air differential pressure transmitters, provide pneumatic

pressure tubing between process and instruments using the

following:

1. Type: Black Polyethylene tubing

2. Construction: flame retardant, flexible, kink resistant

3. Burst Pressure: 500 psig at 75 °F

4. Rating: Meets ASTM and UL ratings for temperature and

smoke; suitable for installation in control panels,

ductwork, air plenums

5. Size: 1/4 in O.D.; use 3/8 in O.D. for longer runs

6. Fittings: brass, barbed

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE

A. Within one month of contract award, provide a schedule of the

work indicating the following:

1. Intended sequence of work items.

2. Start dates of individual work items.

3. Duration of individual work items.

4. Planned delivery dates for major material and equipment

and expected lead times.

5. Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by

other trades or situations.

B. Provide monthly written status reports indicating work

completed, revisions to expected delivery dates, etc. An

updated project schedule shall be included.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control

device and equipment locations. Any discrepancies, conflicts,

or omissions shall be reported to the architect/engineer for

resolution before rough-in work is started.

B. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment

may be installed as shown. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or




omissions shall be reported to the engineer for resolution

before rough-in work is started.

C. The contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications

for other parts of the work. If head room or space conditions

appear inadequate—or if any discrepancies occur between the

plans and the contractor’s work and the plans and the work of

others—the contractor shall report these discrepancies to the

engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes

necessary to accommodate the contractor’s work with the work

of others. Any changes in the work covered by this

specification made necessary by the failure or neglect of the

contractor to report such discrepancies shall be made by—and

at the expense of—this contractor.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. The contractor shall protect all work and material from damage

by his/her work or employees and shall be liable for all

damage thus caused.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and

equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The

contractor shall protect any material that is not immediately

installed. The contractor shall close all open ends of work

with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction

to prevent entry of foreign objects.


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified

in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on

equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to

equipment manufacturer.

B. All equipment shall be delivered to the job site unless

specified otherwise.

C. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure on-time

delivery of all materials and equipment required for the

Project. All materials furnished or incorporated in the Work

shall be new, unused, of best quality, and especially adapted

for the service required; whenever the characteristics of any

material are not particularly specified, such material shall

be utilized as is customary in first class work of a nature

for which the material is employed.




D. Packaging shall be adequate to prevent contamination,

mechanical damage, or deterioration during shipment. The

outermost covering shall be marked with complete vendor

identification.

E. Contractor shall provide necessary means to properly stage and

store all materials and equipment per equipment manufacturer's

instructions until time of use or installation on the Project.

Materials shall be protected from the weather, humidity and

temperature variations, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.

F. Contractor shall be solely responsible for materials and

equipment stored on the Site; type and extent of security

provided to be at Contractor’s discretion. Coordinate all

requirements with Owner.

G. Contractor shall be responsible for proper handling, rigging,

and installing of all materials and equipment for the Project.

H. Owner reserves the right to reject any materials or equipment

that are not properly stored in accordance with these

specifications or the manufacturers’ requirements.

I. Refer to Section 015000, Temporary Facilities and Controls,

for additional delivery and storage requirements.

3.5 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceway parallel to

building lines (i.e., horizontal, vertical, and parallel to

walls) wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for

vibration of piping and equipment.

C. Install all equipment in readily accessible locations as

defined by Chapter 1, Article 100, Part A of the National

Electrical Code (NEC).

D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and

freedom from shorts and grounds.

E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with

acceptable industry specifications and standards for

performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in

strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.





A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules

and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes

and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this specification.

B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation

for code compliance and quality of workmanship.

C. Contractor shall have work inspected by local and / or state

authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of instrumentation shown on plan drawings

with actual installation constraints and installing

contractors.

B. Coordinate supply of electrical circuits for BMS hardware and

controllers, control devices and BMS server and operator

workstations.

C. Coordinate roof penetrations with appropriate contractors,

specification sections and against proper codes, prior to

installing electrical conduits and cabling.

D. Coordinate concrete cutting and coring with appropriate

contractors, specification sections and against proper codes,

prior to installing electrical conduits and cabling.

E. Coordinate any beam penetrations with the design team prior to

execution.

F. Site

1. Where the mechanical work will be installed in close

proximity to, or will interfere with, work of other

trades, the contractor shall assist in working out space

conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If the

contractor installs his / her work before coordinating

with other trades, so as to cause any interference with

work of other trades, the contractor shall make the

necessary changes in his / her work to correct the

condition without additional cost to the owner.

2. Coordinate and schedule work with all other work in the

same area, or with work that is dependent upon other

work, to facilitate mutual progress.

G. Test and Balance




1. The contractor shall furnish a single set of all tools

necessary to interface to the control system for test and

balance purposes.

2. The contractor shall provide training / assistance to the

balancing agent in the use of these tools.

3. In addition, the contractor shall provide a qualified

technician to assist in the test and balance process,

until the first 20 terminal units are balanced.

4. The tools used during the test and balance process will

be returned at the completion of the testing and

balancing.

H. Life Safety

1. Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown

are supplied under Division 26. The contractor shall

interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for shutdown as

described in Sequences of Operation or as specified

otherwise.

2. Fire/smoke dampers and actuators required for fire rated

walls are provided under another Section of Division 25.

Control of these dampers shall be by Division 26 unless

specified otherwise.

I. Coordination with controls specified in other sections or

divisions. Other sections and/or divisions of this

specification include controls and control devices that are to

be part of or interfaced to the control system specified in

this section. These controls shall be integrated into the

system and coordinated by the contractor as follows:

1. All communication media and equipment shall be provided

as specified in Part 2, “Communication” of this

specification.

2. Each supplier of a controls product is responsible for

the configuration, programming, start-up, and testing of

that product to meet the sequences of operation described

in this section.

3. The Contractor shall coordinate and resolve any

incompatibility issues that arise between the control

products provided under this section and those provided

under other sections or divisions of this specification.

4. The contractor is responsible for providing all controls

described in the contract documents regardless of where

within the contract documents these controls are

described.




5. The contractor is responsible for the interface of

control products provided by multiple suppliers

regardless of where this interface is described within

the contract documents.

3.8 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. Temperature Sensor Wells: The contractor may reuse any

existing wells in piping for temperature sensors. These wells

shall be modified as required for proper fit of new sensors.

B. Pneumatic Controllers, Relays and Gauges: {Deliver to owner}

{Become the property of the contractor}.

C. Control Valves: Replace with new.

D. The mechanical system must remain in operation between the

hours of 6 a.m. and 6 p.m., Monday through Friday. No

modifications to the system shall cause the mechanical system

to be shut down for more than 15 minutes or to fail to

maintain space comfort conditions during any such period.

Perform cut-over of controls that cannot meet these conditions

outside of those hours.

E. The scheduling of fans through existing or temporary time

clocks or control system shall be maintained throughout the

DDC system installation.

F. Install control panels where shown.

G. Modify existing starter control circuits, if necessary, to

provide hand/off/auto control of each starter controlled. If

new starters or starter control packages are required, these

shall be included as part of this contract.

H. Patch holes and finish to match existing walls.

3.9 WIRING

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national

and local electrical codes and Division 16 of this

specification. Where the requirements of this section differ

from those in Division 16, the requirements of this section

shall take precedence.

B. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL Listed in

approved raceway according to NEC and Division 16

requirements.




C. All low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements.

(Low-voltage power circuits shall be subfused when required to

meet Class 2 current limit.)

D. Where NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires are in concealed and

accessible locations, including ceiling return air plenums,

approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that

cables are UL Listed for the intended application. For

example, cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL Listed

specifically for that purpose.

E. All wiring in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms—or

where subject to mechanical damage— shall be installed in

raceway at levels below 3 m (10 ft).

F. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1

wiring. Boxes and panels containing high-voltage wiring and

equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for

the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g., relays and

transformers).

G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.

H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run

parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it and neatly

tied at 3 m (10 ft) intervals.

I. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be

supported from or anchored to structural members. Cables shall

not be supported by or anchored to ductwork, electrical

raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

J. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal

block or terminal strip. All wire-to-wire connections shall be

at a terminal block.

K. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and

anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices

and terminals.

L. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120 V.

If only higher voltages are available, the contractor shall

provide step-down transformers.

M. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no

splices permitted between termination points.

N. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls

and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations.




O. Size of raceway and size and type of wire shall be the

responsibility of the contractor, in keeping with the

manufacturer’s recommendations and NEC requirements, except as

noted elsewhere.

P. Include one pull string in each raceway 2.5 cm (1 in.) or

larger.

Q. Use coded conductors throughout with conductors of different

colors.

R. Control and status relays are to be located in designated

enclosures only. These enclosures include packaged equipment

control panel enclosures unless they also contain Class 1

starters.

S. Conceal all raceways, except within mechanical, electrical, or

service rooms. Install raceway to maintain a minimum clearance

of 15 cm (6 in.) from high-temperature equipment (e.g., steam

pipes or flues).

T. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure

and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull

boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie rods.

Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.

U. Adhere to this specification’s Division 26 requirements where

raceway crosses building expansion joints.

V. Install insulated bushings on all raceway ends and openings to

enclosures. Seal top end of all vertical raceways.

W. The Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock

wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams

with terminations identified at the job site.

X. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight, flexible metal

raceways shall not exceed 1 m (3 ft) in length and shall be

supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than ½ in.

electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to

moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight,

flexible metal raceways shall be used.

Y. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported,

properly reamed at both ends, and left clean and free of

obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with couplings

(according to code). Terminations must be made with fittings

at boxes, and ends not terminating in boxes shall have

bushings installed.




Z. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic

interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

3.10 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. The contractor shall adhere to the items listed in the

“Wiring” article in Part 3 of the specification.

B. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike

manner. Follow manufacturer’s installation recommendations for

all communication cabling.

C. Do not install communication wiring in raceway and enclosures

containing Class 1 or other Class 2 wiring.

D. Maximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for cable

installation, as specified by the cable manufacturer, shall

not be exceeded during installation.

E. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network

following the cable installation. Use appropriate test

measures for each particular cable.

F. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor

must be installed between the lines and ground. The lighting

arrestor shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

G. All runs of communication wiring shall be unspliced length

when that length is commercially available.

H. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate

origination and destination data.

I. Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC

regulations article on “Communications Circuits, Cable, and

Protector Grounding.”

3.11 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment

within which the sensor operates.

C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed

junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.




D. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their

raceways or in the wall to stop air from other areas entering

the sensor housing and affecting sensor readings.

E. Sensors used in mixing plenums and hot and cold decks shall be

of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in

a serpentine manner vertically across the duct. Each bend

shall be supported with a capillary clip.

F. Low-limit sensors used in mixing plenums shall be installed in

a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall

be supported with a capillary clip. Provide 3 m of sensing

element for each 1 m2 (1 ft of sensing element for each 1 ft2)

of coil area.

G. All pipe-mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in

wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat-

conducting fluid in thermal wells.

H. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall,

complete with sun shield at designated location. If location

is not designated, clearly identify location on submittal

drawings for approval.

I. Verify location of thermostats, sensors, transmitters, and

other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details

before installation.

1. Install adjustable devices at 48 inches (1220 mm) maximum

above finished floor

2. Install non-adjustable devices at 60 inches (1530 mm)

above finished floor

3. If adjustable devices are mounted adjacent to non-

adjustable devices, mount both at 48 inches (1220 mm)

maximum above finished floor

4. Align sensors horizontally with light switches or other

objects when appropriate

J. Differential air static pressure.

1. Supply Duct Static Pressure: Pipe the high-pressure tap

to the duct using a pitot tube. Pipe the low-pressure

port to a tee in the low-pressure tap tubing of the

corresponding building static pressure sensor or leave

open to the ambient air provided that space is not a

pressurized plenum.

2. Return Duct Static Pressure: Pipe the high-pressure tap

to the duct using a pitot tube. Pipe the low-pressure

port to a tee in the low-pressure tap tubing of the




corresponding building static pressure sensor or leave

open to the ambient air provided that space is not a

pressurized plenum.

3. Building Static Pressure: Pipe the low-pressure port of

the pressure sensor to the static pressure port located

on the outside of the building through a high-volume

accumulator. Pipe the high-pressure port to an indoor

pressure sensing apparatus mounted on the wall or ceiling

that cannot be tampered with.

4. The piping to the pressure ports on all pressure

transducers shall contain a capped test port located

adjacent to the transducer for use during balancing and

commissioning.

5. All pressure transducers, other than those controlling

VAV boxes, shall be located in field device panels, not

on the equipment monitored or on ductwork. Mount

transducers in a location accessible for service without

use of ladders or special equipment.

6. All air and water differential pressure sensors shall

have gauge tees mounted adjacent to the taps. Water

gauges shall also have shutoff valves installed before

the tee.

3.12 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

A. Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.

B. Trim / adjust flow switch in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

3.13 VFD CONFIGURATION

A. Coordinate with the VFD startup technician to configure

necessary parameters for BMS control, monitoring, and any

other related features.

B. It is the responsibility of this section to modify or

configure any and all parameters needed to fulfill this scope

of work.

3.14 ACTUATORS

A. Mount and link control damper actuators according to

manufacturer’s instructions.




B. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on

normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5°

open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the

linkage.

C. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that

actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both

open and closed positions.

D. Provide all mounting hardware and linkages for actuator

installation.

E. Electric/Electronic

1. Dampers: Actuators shall be direct-mounted on damper

shaft or jackshaft unless specifically shown as a linkage

installation. For low-leakage dampers with seals, the

actuator shall be mounted with a minimum 5° available for

tightening the damper seals. Actuators shall be mounted

following manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Valves: Actuators shall be connected to valves with

adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators

and adapters shall be mounted following the actuator

manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.15 WARNING LABELS

A. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all equipment

that can be automatically started by the DDC system.

B. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on

a red background.

C. Warning labels shall read as follows:

1. CAUTION: This equipment is operating under automatic

control and may start or stop at any time without

warning. Switch disconnect to “OFF” before servicing.

D. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all motor

starters and all control panels provided under this section

that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing

separate disconnects.

E. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on

a red background.

F. Warning labels shall read as follows:




1. CAUTION: This equipment is fed from more than one power

source with separate disconnects. Disconnect all power

sources before servicing.

3.16 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. Nameplates and tags bearing device unique identifiers shall be

permanently attached to, engraved or stamped on each piece of

equipment, as applicable.

B. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-

fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 5 cm (2

in.) of termination with the DDC address or termination

number.

C. All pneumatic tubing shall be labeled at each end within 5 cm

(2 in.) of termination with a descriptive identifier.

D. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips

to show the instrument or item served.

E. Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm (½ in.) letters on

laminated plastic nameplates.

F. Identify all other control components with permanent labels.

All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of

the component does not remove the label.

G. Identify room sensors relating to terminal box or valves with

nameplates.

H. Manufacturers’ nameplates and UL or CSA labels are to be

visible and legible after equipment is installed.

I. All labeling / identifiers shall match record documents.

Likewise, record documents shall show all device / component

labeling.

3.17 PROGRAMMING

A. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified sequences

of operation and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of

25% of available memory free for future use.

B. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design,

allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written

point index. Use the following naming convention: AA.BBB.CCDDE

where:




1. AA is used to designate the location of the point within

the building, such as mechanical room, wing, or level, or

the building itself in a multi-building environment,

2. BBB is used to designate the mechanical system with which

the point is associated (e.g., A01, HTG, CLG, LTG),

3. CC represents the equipment or material referenced (e.g.,

SF for supply fan, RW for return water, EA for exhaust

air, ZN for zone),

4. D or DD may be used for clarification or for

identification if more than one CC exists (e.g., SF10,

ZNB),

5. E represents the action or state of the equipment or

medium (e.g., T for temperature, H for humidity, C for

control, S for status, D for damper control, I for

current).

3.18 SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING

A. Provide programming for the system and adhere to the sequences

of operation provided. All other system programming necessary

for the operation of the system, but not specified in this

document, also shall be provided by the contractor.

B. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements

to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment

statements shall reflect the language used in the sequences of

operation.

3.19 COMMISSIONING

A. General

1. The term ‘commissioning’ in this section refers to the

testing process for this facility and may involve several

parties and require different methods and documentation.

2. Systems found to be deficient shall be corrected

immediately. Deficiencies noted during Owner operation

shall be corrected immediately under the one year project

equipment and labor warranty.

3. The integrator’s technician shall document any and all

verification and testing performed and submit required

documentation to the engineer, owner’s representative,

commissioning agent and owner. See O&M section for

documentation requirements.




4. The owner will engage a testing / commissioning agent to

witness various stages of testing. Contractor is

required to coordinate with agent, fulfill requirements

of agent related to testing and documentation, and attend

required commissioning meetings.

5. For all testing stages (factory acceptance testing, pre-

functional testing, functional testing) the integrator

shall submit all related documentation and notification

of completeness within (3) days of the testing. This

notification shall serve to assist the testing /

commissioning agent and engineer that any additional

required verification, retesting or demonstration can

commence. In general, provide good communication related

to testing schedules, progress and results to keep all

stakeholders up to speed.

6. Provide test scripts / procedures related to testing /

verification of systems / components to the engineer,

commissioning agent and owner (30) days prior to start of

the associated testing activity.

7. Unless specified otherwise, provide a schedule of

anticipated testing activities to the engineer,

commissioning agent and owner (30) days prior to the

start of the first testing activity.

B. Factory Acceptance Testing

1. Provide verification of the construction or development

of portions of the control systems that are assembled, or

configured off-site.

2. Provide the services of a factory trained and qualified

technician who shall verify at a minimum:

a. Network installation (Ethernet / fiber)

b. Network configuration

c. Power installation

d. BMS point-to-point checkout

e. Integration point-to-point checkout

f. Graphics point and operation verification

g. Alarm and trend configuration

h. Control Panel Assembly

i. Simulation of sequences of operation

3. BMS contractor / integrator to provide transportation and

lodging accommodations for engineer, owner and owner’s

representatives up to (5) people.




C. Pre-functional Testing

1. Portions of pre-functional testing may be witnessed by

the owner or owner’s representative. The intent of this

witnessing is to allow the owner insight into the testing

process and system implementation to improve operational

understanding.

2. Provide the services of a factory trained and qualified

technician who shall verify at a minimum:

a. Network installation (Ethernet / fiber)

b. Network configuration

c. Power installation

d. BMS point-to-point checkout

e. Integration point-to-point checkout

f. Graphics point and operation verification

g. Alarm and trend configuration

h. Control Panel Assembly

3. Calibration / verification of field devices and

instruments:

a. Verification that all instruments have been

installed per manufacturer’s requirements

b. Verification all instruments are properly configured

and operating per manufacturer’s performance

specifications.

c. Verification that control valves are installed

correctly and providing appropriate flow control

performance and characteristics based on original

design / selection.

D. Functional Testing

1. Prior to starting functional testing, contractor shall

submit all completed pre-functional testing documents,

installation checklists, and factory startup

documentation (where applicable) to the owner’s

representative for review.

2. Contractor shall provide a functional test procedure for

review prior to performing functional testing. The

document shall describe the proposed approach to

functional testing and how each aspect of system

operation will be verified. The procedure shall identify

the test method, the anticipated results, and provide a

place to document actual results with appropriate notes

and comments.




3. Portions of functional testing will be witnessed by the

owner or owner’s representative. Contractor shall

provide appropriate resources to support this effort.

4. Contractor shall perform and document functional systems

testing after point integration, graphics creation, and

alarm and trend configuration.




HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining

methods for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping.

2. Chilled-water piping.

3. Condensate-drain piping.

4. Air-vent piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Steel pipe.

2. Copper pipe.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly

of hangers and supports for multiple pipes, and

attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of and details for penetrations, including

sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior walls, floors,

basement, and foundation walls.

3. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping

for fire- and smoke-rated wall and floor and ceiling

assemblies.





A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which

the following items are shown and coordinated with each other,

using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Other building services.

3. Structural members.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel

according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -

Steel."

B. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for

materials, products, and installation.

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification

tests for welding processes involved and that

certification is current.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable

of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and

temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg F.

2. Chilled-Water Piping: 100 psig 200 deg F.

3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.

4. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.




2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends;

welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated

in "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250

as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and

300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300

as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1,

Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes

spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to

match adjoining pipe.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings:

ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the

following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

H. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and

wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

I. Use long radius elbows whenever space conditions allow.




2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and

thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch

(3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron

and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-

iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include

water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-

phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1,

silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for

welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical

analysis of steel pipe being welded.

F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for

fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous

materials with separating nonconductive insulating material.

Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and

threaded ferrous.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall

be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper

fittings, and soldered joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger


1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and

wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings,

and welded and flanged joints.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be

the following:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper

fittings, and soldered joints.

D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall

be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and

wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings,

and welded and flanged joints.

E. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing,

wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

F. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Same as service where installed.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as

indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on

Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise

indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment

rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to




building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient

space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch

connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or

greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to

permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball

valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low

points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for

system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in

direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed

with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main

pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main

pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the

main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 230523 "General Duty

Valves for HVAC Piping".

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to

valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as

indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final

connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.




S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric

fitting.

T. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings,

and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in

Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls

and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified

in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls,

ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons

specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of

dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric

unions.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support,

and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for

maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal

piping less than 20 feet long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for

individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal

piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and

supports in direct contact with copper pipe.




C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum

spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet.

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet.

3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet.

4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet.

5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet.

6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the

following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4

inch.

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8

inch.


inch.

5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.


inch.

7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod

size, 3/8 inch.

E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot

intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain

ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside

of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux,

unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints

according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.




D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads

according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using

sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and

restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external

pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with

threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe

sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to

AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding

operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size,

type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket

concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt

threads.

3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the

same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to

connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve.

If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is

required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil

inlet and outlet connections. Comply with requirements in

Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as

follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed

for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that

cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If




temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion

joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then

remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to

isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of

sealing against test pressure without damage to valve.

Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-

third higher than test pressure, to protect against

damage by expanding liquid or other source of

overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless

there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid

that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may

be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points

of system to release air. Use drains installed at low

points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic

system is full of water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that

is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure.

Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any

vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under

test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of

vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified

minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in

Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at

least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections

for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or

replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until

there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.

2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.




3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system

pressure.

4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine

if all are installed and operating freely (automatic

type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for

full flow.

6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic

equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to

specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.




HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 1

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the

following:

1. Hot-water heating piping.

2. Chilled-water piping.

3. Air-vent piping.

4. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.



1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on

manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing

valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air-control devices.

3. Hydronic specialties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-control devices,

hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve

and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes,

hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.





A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the

appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air

separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable

of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and

temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F.

2. Chilled-Water Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F.

3. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.

4. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the

pressure of the piping system to which it is attached.

2.2 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with

requirements specified in Section 230523 "General Duty Valves

for HVAC.

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors:

Comply with requirements specified in Section 230900

“Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC”.

1. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice

or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

4. Plug: Resin.

5. Seat: PTFE.

6. End Connections: Threaded or socket.




7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable

differential pressure meter.

8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set

position.

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).

10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

C. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe

pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.

2. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

3. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

4. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

5. Seat: PTFE.

6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable

differential pressure meter.

8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set

position.

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).


D. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASME labeled.

1. Body: Bronze or brass.


3. Seat: Brass.


5. Diaphragm: EPT.

6. Low inlet-pressure check valve.

7. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.

8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to

suit system in which installed, with operating pressure

and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

E. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: ASME labeled.

1. Body: Bronze or brass.





3. Seat: Brass.


5. Diaphragm: EPT.

6. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.

7. Inlet Strainer: bronze, removable without system

shutdown.

8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and

selected to suit system in which installed, with

operating pressure and capacity factory set and field

adjustable.

2.3 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).

6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).


B. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4 (DN 8).



C. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks:




1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) working

pressure and 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating

temperature. Factory test after taps are fabricated and

supports installed and are labeled according to ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,

Division 1.

2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge

from system water to maintain required expansion

capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with

EPDM seats.

D. Tangential-Type Air Separators:

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-

psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and 375 deg F

(191 deg C) maximum operating temperature.

2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel,

constructed to direct released air into expansion tank.

3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for

NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-

1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded.

5. Size: Match system flow capacity.

2.4 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover

and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and

smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20-mesh strainer, or

perforated stainless-steel basket.


B. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with

bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and

smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.




3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated

stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.


C. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible,

bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment

connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment.



D. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body.

2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with

Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges.

3. Performance: Capable of misalignment.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to

supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of

equipment.

B. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to

return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return

pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as

required to control flow direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as

required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install

drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves




to the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as

indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation

requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to

regulate system fill pressure.

3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-

transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air

venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in

mechanical equipment rooms only. Install manual vents at heat-

transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air

purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward

tank.

D. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install

blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full

size to nearest floor drain.

E. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from

hydronic system, and ensure that tank is properly charged with

air to suit system Project requirements.




HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 1

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.

2. Separately coupled, base-mounted, double-suction

centrifugal pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified

performance curves and rated capacities, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller

dimensions, and accessories for each type of product

indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing

foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in






1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but

are not limited to, the following:

a. Armstrong

b. Bell & Gossett

c. Grundfos Paco

d. Taco

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal,

overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-line pump as defined in

HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and

motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage

tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear

rings, and flanged connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and

dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a

locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim

impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring

against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring,





and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on

shaft between motor and seal.

5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed

and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service

factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified

in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof.

b. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball

bearings.

2.2 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, DOUBLE-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL

PUMPS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but

are not limited to, the following:

a. Armstrong

b. Bell & Gossett

c. Grundfos Paco

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal,

impeller-between-bearings, separately coupled, double-suction

pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base

mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Horizontally split, cast iron, with replaceable

bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and

outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of

volute, and ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges. Casing

supports shall allow removal and replacement of impeller

without disconnecting piping.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and

dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft. For pumps not

frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match

specified performance.





3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a

minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided

yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite

rings, and bronze packing gland.

5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-

iron housing with grease fittings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider

capable of absorbing vibration. Couplings shall be drop-out

type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump

shaft or motor. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed

applications.

E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8;

OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting

frame.

F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory

fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate

to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

G. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with

adjustable alignment. VFD ready.







Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof.

b. Motor Bearings: Grease lubricated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual

locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions

where pumps are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions


3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance

including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and

accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is

not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by

piping.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete

equipment bases.

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices

specified in Section 23054 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

E. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-

thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to

support weight of in-line pumps.

1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports

specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform

alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for

alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet

and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor

feet and base frame.




C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written

instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly

but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink,

nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are

in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation

bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for

service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as

piping connected to pumps.

C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater

than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. Install check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge

side of pumps.

E. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of

pumps.

F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of

base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

G. Install single gage, with multiple-input selector valve, piped

to suction and discharge flange tappings.

H. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and


I. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE


startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to


2. Check piping connections for tightness.




3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before

starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that

pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with

pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not

operate until cause of trouble is determined and

corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct

direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains,

and prepare pump for operation.

6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train

Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

hydronic pumps.




STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING AND VALVES 232213 - 1

SECTION 232213 - STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING AND VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL



General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,

apply to this Section.

B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual

are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is

directly applicable to them.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install steam and

condensate pipe, valves and fittings indicated by the Contract

Documents with supplementary items necessary for the proper

installation of the steam and condensate piping systems.


A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be

applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific

edition date.

B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date

of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project.

C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with

the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the

following references and as noted in this Section:

1. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

2. ANSI/ASME SEC B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

3. ANSI/AWS D10.12 – Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe.

4. ASTM A234 – Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.

5. ASME B36.1 – Standardization of dimensions of welded and

seamless wrought steel pipe for high or low temperatures

and pressures.





A. Valve manufacturer’s name and pressure rating shall be marked

on valve body.

B. All valves of the same type shall be provided from same

manufacturer.

C. All fittings of the same type (threaded or welding) shall be

provided from same manufacturer.

D. All flanges shall be from same manufacturer.

E. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to Chapter V,

ANSI/ASME SEC B31.9 and applicable state labor regulations.

F. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/AWS D10.12.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves,

and accessories.

B. Record Documents:

1. Include welder’s certification of compliance with

ANSI/AWS D10.12 and ANSI/ASME B31.9.

2. Submittal data for all fittings and flanges shall include

a letter signed by an official of the manufacturing

company certifying compliance with these Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced

standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform

to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Piping System Classification:

1. Piping systems designed for steam pressure below 25 psig

are low-pressure steam systems.




2. Piping systems designed for steam pressures from 25 psig

up to and including 125 psig are medium-pressure steam.

3. Systems 126 psig and above are high-pressure steam.

C. Piping Materials:

1. Sizes as scheduled and shown on the Drawings are nominal

pipe sizes unless otherwise indicated.

2. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured by a domestic

company.

3. All brass and bronze piping components shall have no more

than 15 percent zinc content.

D. Threaded Fittings:

1. All threaded fittings shall be USA factory made wrought

carbon or alloy steel threaded fittings conforming to

ASTM A234 or malleable iron threaded fittings conforming

to ASME/ANSI B16.3.

2. Manufacturers: Grinnell, Tube Turns, Weldbend, Hackney,

Taylor Forge, Ladish Company.

3. Each fitting shall be stamped as specified by ANSI B16.3.

E. Welded Fittings:

1. All weld fittings shall be USA factory made wrought

carbon steel, butt welded fittings conforming to ASTM

A234 or ASME B16.9.

2. Manufacturers: Grinnell, Tube Turns, Weldbend, Hackney,

Taylor Forge, Ladish Company.

3. Each fitting shall be stamped as specified by ANSI B31.9.

F. Flanges:

1. All 150 lb. and 300 lb. ANSI flanges shall be weld neck

and shall be domestically manufactured, forged carbon

steel, conforming to ANSI B16.5 and ASTM A1-191 Grade I

or II or A-105.

2. Manufacturers: Tube Turn, Hackney or Ladish Company.

3. Slip on flanges shall not be used.

4. Complete test reports may be required for any fitting

selected at random.

5. Flanges shall have the manufacturer’s trademark

permanently identified in accordance with MSS SP-25.




6. Bolts used shall be carbon steel bolts with semi-finished

hexagon nuts of American Standard Heavy dimensions.

a. All-thread rods are not an acceptable substitute for

flange bolts.

b. Bolts shall have a tensile strength of 60,000 psi

and an elastic limit of 30,000 psi.

7. Gaskets:

a. All flanged joints shall have gaskets.

b. Place gasket between flanges of flanged joints.

c. Gaskets shall fit within the bolt circle on raised

face flanges and shall be full face on flat face

flanges.

G. Gaskets:

1. Gaskets shall be placed between the flanges of all flange

joints. Such gaskets shall be ring form gaskets fitting

within the bolt circle of their respective flanges.

2. All gaskets used on steam system shall be Flexitallic

Style CG, AP1061 spiral wound 30455 with Grafoil fill as

manufactured by Garlock, or approved equal, regardless of

pipe size and pressure.

3. The inside diameter of such gaskets shall conform to the

nominal pipe size and the outside diameter shall be such

that the gasket extends outward to the studs or bolts

employed in the flanged joint.

2.2 PIPE

A. High Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate Piping:

1. Pipe 2 inches and smaller: Carbon steel, ASTM A53, Grade

B, seamless, Schedule 80.

a. Fittings: Forged steel, ASTM A105, socket weld, 300

lb.

b. Joints: Socket weld.

c. Unions: Forged steel, ASTM A105, socket weld, 3000

lb., stainless steel seats.

d. Gaskets: Flexitallic Style CG, API 601 sprial wound

304SS with Grafoil Fill or accepted substitution.




e. Cathodic Protection Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick Sealon

by Ameriflex. Specify OD and ID of pipe and

flanges. Bolt holes to be ¼ inch oversized.

2. Pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger: Carbon steel, ASTM A53,

Grade B, seamless; standard weight for steam, and ERW

schedule 80 for condensate.

a. Fittings: Carbon steel, ASTM A234 WPB, seamless

welding fittings, standard weight for steam,

Schedule 80 for condensate.

b. Joints: Butt weld.

c. Flanges: 300 lb., ANSI forged carbon steel, ASTM

A181 Class 70, weld neck raised face.

d. Gaskets: Flexitallic Style CG, API 601 spiral wound

304SS with Grafoil Fill or accepted substitution.

e. Cathodic Protection Gaskets: 1/8 inch thick Sealon

by Ameriflex. Specify OD and ID of pipe and

flanges. Bolt holes to be ¼ inch oversized.

B. Medium Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate Piping:


B, seamless, Schedule 80.

a. Fittings: 125 lb., cast iron, screwed, conforming

to ANSI B16.4. Thread-o-lets may be used when the

branch line is 1/3 the main size or less.

b. Joints: Screwed.

c. Unions: Class 300 malleable iron.


Grade B, seamless, standard weight for steam, and ERW


a. Fittings: ASTM A234, Grade WPB, ANSI B16.9; butt

welding type, standard weight for steam, Schedule 80

for trapped condensate. Thread-o-lets may be used

when the branch line is one-third the main size or

less.


c. Flanges: Class 150, ANSI B16.5, forged carbon

steel, raised face. Materials in accord with ASTM

A105, Grade II weld neck.

C. Low Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate Piping:





B seamless, Schedule 40 for steam, Schedule 80 for

condensate.

a. Fittings: 125 pound black cast iron. Thread-o-lets

may be used when the branch line is one-third the

main size or less.

b. Joints: Threaded.

c. Unions: Class 300 malleable iron.


Grade B, seamless, standard weight for steam, and ERW


a. Fittings: Butt weld, conforming to ASTM A234, Grade

WPB, ANSI B16.9, standard weight for steam, Schedule

80 for trapped condensate.


c. Flanges: Class 150, ANSI B16.5, forged steel,

raised face. Materials in accord with ASTM A105,

Grade II, weld neck.

D. Condensate Piping – Return and Pumped Return:

1. All piping shall be ERW extra strong black steel piping.

2. Fittings on piping 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be extra

heavy butt welding type. Flanges shall be 150 lb.

welding neck type. Extra strong Weld-o-lets, Thread-o-

lets or shaped nipples may be used only when takeoff is

one-third or less nominal size of main.

3. Screwed fittings around traps and for piping 2 inches and

smaller shall be 125 lb. black cast iron (300 lb. for

unions).

2.3 VALVES

A. General:

1. All valves used in steam systems (low and medium

pressure) shall be Class 150 SWP. Class 300 valves shall

be constructed of all ASTM B-61 composition. All gate,

globe and angle valves shall be union bonnet design.

Metal used in the stems of all bronze gate, globe and

angle valves shall conform to ASTM B371 Alloy 694, ASTM

B99 Alloy 651 or other corrosion resistant equivalents.




Written approval by the Owner must be secured for the use

of alternative materials.

2. Manufacturers: NIBCO, Crane, Velan, Williams and Vogt.

3. All ductile Iron body valves shall have pressure

containing parts constructed of ASTM A-395. Ductile iron

stem material shall meet ASTM 371 Alloy 876 silicon

bronze or its equivalent. Gates and globes shall be

bolted bonnet with OS&Y (outside screw and yoke) and

rising stem design.

4. All cast steel body valves shall have the pressure

containing parts constructed of ASTM designation

A-216-GR-WCB carbon steel. Gate and globe valves shall be

bolted bonnet outside and screw and yoke design with

pressure-temperature rating conforming to ANSI

B16-34-1977. Stems shall meet ASTM designation A-186-F6

chromium stainless steel. Wedge (gate valves) may be

solid or flexible type and shall meet ASTM A-182-F6

chromium stainless steel on valves from 2 inch to 6 inch.

Sizes 8 inch and larger may be A-216-WCB with forged

rings or overlay equal to 182-F6. Seat ring shall be hard

faced carbon steel or 13 percent chromium A-182-F6

stainless. Handwheels shall be A47 Grade 35018 malleable

iron or Ductile Iron ASTM A536.

5. All forged steel body valves shall have the pressure

containing parts constructed of ASTM 105, Grade 2 forged

carbon steel. Seat and wedges shall meet ASTM A-182-F6

chromium stainless steel. Seat rings shall be hard faced.

Valves shall conform to ANSI B16-34 pressure-temperature

rating.

6. All gate valves, globe valves, angle valves and shutoff

valves of every character shall have malleable iron hand

wheels, except iron body valves 2-1/2 inches and larger

which may have either malleable iron or ASTM A-126 Class

B, gray iron hand wheels.

7. Packing for all valves shall be free of asbestos fibers

and selected for the pressure-temperature service of the

valve. It is incumbent upon the manufacturer to select

the best quality, standard packing for the intended valve

service.

8. Valves 6 inches and larger located with stem in

horizontal position shall be drilled and tapped in

accordance with MSS-SP-45 to accommodate a drain valve

and equalizing bypass valve assembly.




9. Valve Operator: Provide valve chain operator type on all

shutoff valves shown on the Drawings that are 7'-6" above

finished floor and higher. Chain operator shall be chain

wheel of cast iron or malleable iron and designed to

provide positive grip on wheel. Provide chain guide to

prevent chain from slipping or jumping on wheel. Employ

rust-proof chain complete with closing link of sufficient

length to operate at 6'-6" above floor level.

B. Gate Valves:

1. High Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate:

a. Socket Welded Pipe: 800 psig forged steel, welded

bonnet, bolted gland, outside screw and yoke.

Thread ends Vogt Ser. 2801 or socket weld Vogt 2801

SW.

b. Welded Pipe: Class 300 OS&Y, bolted flexible wedge

disc. Crane Fig. No. 33 welded and flanged.

2. Medium and Low Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate:

a. Threaded Pipe: 150 lb., screwed, bronze gate,

rising stem, union bonnet, NIBCO T-134.

b. Welded Pipe: 150 lb. flanged OS&Y gate valve

ductile iron, NIBCO F-637-31.

3. Building Condensate Return and Pumped Return:

a. Threaded Pipe: 150 lb., screwed, bronze gate,

rising stem, union bonnet, NIBCO T-134.

b. Welded Pipe: 125 lb. flanged OS&Y gate valve


C. Globe Valves:


a. Manufacturers: NIBCO, Crane, Williams, Vogt, Velan.

b. Socket Welded Pipe: 800 psig forged steel, welded

bonnet, bolted gland, outside screw and yoke.

Thread ends Vogt Ser. 2821 or socket weld Vogt 2821

SW.

2. Medium Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate:

a. Threaded Pipe: 200 lb., screwed, bronze globe

valve, rising stem, with 500 Brinnell hardness plug

disc and seat ring. NIBCO T-256-AP.




b. Welded Pipe: 150 lb. Flanged OS&Y globe valve


3. Low Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate:



disc and seat ring. NIBCO T-256-AP.

b. Welded Pipe 150 lb flanged OS&Y globe valve Ductile

Iron NIBCO F-738-31.

4. Building Condensate Return and Pumped Return:



disc and sear ring. NIBCO T-256-AP.

b. Welded Pipe: 150 lb. flanges OS&Y globe valve

Ductile Iron NIBCO F-738-31.

D. Check Valves:


a. Socket Welded Pipe: 800 lb., forged steel, socket

weld, stainless steel seat and disc, swing check.

Crane No. 3682X or accepted substitution.

b. Welded Pipe: Class 300 carbon steel, bolted cover,

weld end (flanged end where designated), stainless

steel seat and disc, swing check, 147XU flanged.

c. Manufacturers: NIBCO, Crane, Williams, Velan, Vogt.

2. Medium Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate:

a. Threaded Pipe: 150 lb., screwed, horizontal swing

check valve with screwed cap. NIBCO T-433-B.

b. Welded Pipe: 150 lb. flanged horizontal, swing

check valve, ductile iron with bolted cap. NIBCO

F938-31.

3. Low Pressure Steam and Trapped Condensate, and Building

Condensate Return, and Pumped Return:

a. Threaded Pipe: 150 lb., screwed, horizontal swing

check valve with screwed cap NIBCO T-433-B.

b. Welded Pipe: 150 lb. flanged horizontal, swing

check valve, ductile iron with bolted cap. NIBCO

F938-31.

E. Ball Valves:




1. Two-piece bronze body rated at 150 psi steam, TFE seats,

stainless steel ball and stem. NIBCO T-585-70-66.

2. The following manufacturers are acceptable if they comply

with the specification: NIBCO, Apollo, or Watts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous

pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

All piping shall be clean when it is installed. Before

installation it shall be checked, upended, swabbed if

necessary, and all rust or dirt from storage or from lying on

the ground shall be removed.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or

unions.

D. After completion, fill, clean and treat systems.

3.2 WELDING OF STEAM SYSTEM PIPING

A. Steam and condensate piping and fittings shall be welded and

fabricated in accordance with the latest edition of ASME/ANSI

the latest editions of Standards B31.9 for all systems.

Machine beveling in shop is preferred. Field beveling may be

done by flame cutting to recognized standards.

B. Ensure complete penetration of deposited metal with base

metal. Provide filler metal suitable for use with base metal.

Keep inside of fittings free from globules of weld metal. All

welded pipe joints shall be made by the fusion welding

process, employing a metallic arc or gas welding process.

All pipe shall have the ends beveled 37-1/2 degrees and all

joints shall be aligned true before welding. Except as

specified otherwise, all changes in direction, intersection of

lines, reduction in pipe size and the like shall be made with

factory-fabricated welding fittings. Mitering of pipe to form

elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, or any similar

construction is not permitted.




C. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than

1/16-inch. Set all fittings and joints square and true, and

preserve alignment during welding operation. Use of alignment

rods inside pipe is prohibited.

D. No weld shall project into the pipe so as to restrict it.

Tack welds, if used, must be of the same material and made by

the same procedure as the completed weld. Otherwise, remove

tack welds during welding operation.

E. Remove all split, bent, flattened or otherwise damaged piping

from the Project Site.

F. Remove dirt, scale and other foreign matter from the inside of

piping, by swabbing or flushing, prior to the connection of

piping sections, fittings, valves or equipment.

G. Schedule 40 pipe shall be welded with not less than three

passes including one stringer/root, one filter and one lacer.

Schedule 80 pipe shall be welded with not less than four

passes including one stringer/root, two filler and one lacer.

In all cases, however, the weld must be filled before the cap

weld is added.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal,

state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform

to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

published recommendations.

C. Pipe Installation:

1. Direct connection of a steam exhaust, blowoff or drip

pipe shall not be made with the building drainage system.

Discharge into the building drainage system shall be at a

temperature not higher than 140 degrees F. When higher

temperatures exist, approved cooling methods shall be

provided.

2. All the various piping systems shall be made up straight

and true and routed in an orderly manner, plumb and

parallel to the building structure. Install piping to

conserve building space. Coordinate location with other

trades and do not interfere with use of space for other

work.




3. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes

shown on Drawings, which take into consideration

conditions to be met at the Project Site.

4. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be

changed or rerouted after proper approval has been

obtained.

5. All piping shall be installed with due regard to

expansion and contraction and to prevent excessive strain

and stress in the piping, in connections, or in equipment

to which the lines are connected.

6. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

7. Slope piping and arrange system to drain at low points.

Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of pipe level.

8. Where pipe support members are welded to structural

building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat

of zinc rich primer to welding.

9. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and

access to valves and fittings.

10. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for

finish painting.

11. Procedure of Assembling Screw Pipe Fittings:

a. All screw joints shall be made with taper threads,

properly cut.

b. Joints shall be made tight with Teflon-based

compound appropriate to the medium, material, and

temperature range of the system. Teflon tape is not

permitted.

c. Compound shall be applied to the pipe threads only

and not to fittings.

d. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be

carefully reamed to remove any burrs.

e. Before installing pipe that has been cut and

threaded, lengths of pipe shall be upended and

hammered to remove all shavings and foreign

material.

D. Valve Installation:

1. Locate all valves such that the removal of their bonnets

is possible.




2. All flanged valves shown in horizontal lines with the

valve stem in a horizontal position shall be positioned

so the valve stem is inclined one bolt hole above the

horizontal position.

3. Screw pattern valves placed in horizontal lines shall be

installed with their valve stems at a minimum 30 degree

angle above the horizontal position.

4. All valves must be true and straight at the time the

system is tested and inspected for final acceptance.

5. Install valves as nearly as possible to the locations

indicated in the Drawings. Any change in valve location

must be so indicated on the Record Drawings.

6. Equipment, valves, expansion joints, relief devices,

strainers, etc., must be removed or isolated during the

test if the pressure/force ratings of the devices are not

as high as that specified for the test. Piping shall be

drained and protected any time ambient temperature is

below freezing.

7. Where leaks occur, the pipe shall be repaired and the

tests repeated. No leaks shall be corrected by peening.

Defective piping and joints shall be removed and

replaced.

8. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

Coordinate size and location of access doors with

architectural drawings.

9. At the end of one year, period spot checks will be made

and should the valve packing show signs of hardening or

causing stem corrosion, all valves supplied by the

manufacturer shall be repacked by the Contractor, at no

expense to the Owner, with a packing material selected by

the Owner.

3.4 CLEANING AND FLUSHING OF STEAM SYSTEMS

A. General:

1. Thoroughly clean steam and condensate systems before

placing into operation to rid systems of rust, dirt,

piping compound, mill scale, oil, grease, any and all

other material foreign to water being circulated.

2. Exercise extreme care during construction to prevent dirt

and other foreign matter from entering pipe or other

parts of systems. Pipe stored on the project shall have




open ends capped and equipment shall have openings fully

protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting,

or valve shall be visually examined and dirt removed.

3. Chemicals, feeding devices and water technician services

shall be furnished by a single reputable manufacturer who

will be responsible for the complete cleaning and

flushing of the systems. Provide only chemical products

that are acceptable under State and local pollution

control regulations.

4. Add a temporary line with drain and isolate the building

steam and condensate piping from the campus/building

distribution piping to allow for proper circulation and

cleaning of new piping in the new or modified building

system.

5. Clean systems with a chemical compound specifically

formulated for the purpose of removing the above listed

foreign matter. These chemicals shall be injected to the

systems, circulated and completely flushed out. Repeat

the process if required. After each flushing, remove and

thoroughly clean all strainers.

6. Final connection shall not be made to the campus/building

loop system until the Chemical Contractor has filed with

the Owner’s representatives, a report stating that the

systems are clean.

3.5 TESTING

A. Weldings:

1. All welds are subject to inspection, visual and/or x-ray,

for compliance with Specifications. The Owner will, at

the Owner’s option, provide employees or employ a testing

laboratory for the purposes of performing said

inspections and/or x-ray testing. Initial visual and x-

ray inspections will be provided by the Owner.

Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, material

and travel expenses involved in the re-inspection and

retesting of any welds found to be unacceptable. In

addition, Contractor shall be responsible for the costs

involved in any and all additional testing required or

recommended by ASME/ANSI Standards B31.9 and B31.3 due to

the discovery of poor, unacceptable or rejected welds.

2. Welds lacking penetration, containing excessive porosity

or cracks, or are found to be unacceptable for any




reason, must be removed and replaced with an original

quality weld as specified herein. All qualifying tests,

welding and stress relieving procedures shall, moreover,

be in accord with Standard Qualification for Welding

Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators, Appendix A,

Section 6 of the Code, current edition.

B. Pipe Pressure:

1. Equipment, valves, vents, expansion joints, pressure

reducing stations, etc., must be removed or isolated from

test pressure and/or forces if the devices are not rated

for the test pressures. All water must be drained from

all steam system piping and devices after test

completion. Piping shall be drained and protected any

time the ambient is below freezing.

2. The following lines shall be tested at the stated

pressure for the length of time noted:

Line

Testing

Medium

Testing

Pressure

(psig)

Time in

Hours

Steam HP Water 150 24

Steam

Condensate

H.P.

Water 150 24

Pumped

Condensate

Return

Water 150 24

3. Where leaks occur, repair pipe and repeat tests. No leaks

shall be corrected by peening. Remove and replace

defective piping and joints.




STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES 232216 - 1

SECTION 232216 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following piping specialties for LP steam

and condensate piping:

1. Strainers.

2. Steam traps.

3. Thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers.



1. Steam trap.

2. Air vent and vacuum breaker.

3. Meter.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For valves, safety valves,

pressure-reducing valves, steam traps, air vents, vacuum

breakers, and meters to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals.


A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to

the following:

1. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall

bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp




flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding

the following minimum working pressures and temperatures

unless otherwise indicated:

1. HP Steam Piping: 125 psig.

2. LP Steam Piping: 25 psig.

3. Condensate Piping: 40 psig at 250 deg F.

4. Air-Vent and Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Equal to pressure of

the piping system to which it is attached.

5. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to pressure

of the piping system to which it is attached.

2.2 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with

requirements specified in Section 232213 Steam and Steam

Condensate Piping and Valves.

2.3 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron, with bolted cover


2. End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and

smaller; flanged ends for strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20-mesh strainer, or

perforated stainless-steel basket.

4. Tapped blowoff plug.

5. CWP Rating: 250-psig working steam pressure.

B. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron, with bolted cover





2. End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and

smaller; flanged ends for strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20 mesh strainer, and

perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free

area.

4. CWP Rating: 250-psig working steam pressure.

2.4 STEAM TRAPS

A. Thermostatic Traps:

1. Body: Bronze angle-pattern body with integral union

tailpiece and screw-in cap.

2. Trap Type: Balanced-pressure.

3. Bellows: Stainless steel or monel.

4. Head and Seat: Replaceable, hardened stainless steel.

5. Pressure Class: 125.

B. Thermodynamic Traps:

1. Body: Stainless steel with screw-in cap.

2. End Connections: Threaded.

3. Disc and Seat: Stainless steel.

4. Maximum Operating Pressure: 600 psig.

C. Float and Thermostatic Traps:

1. Body and Bolted Cap: ASTM A 126, cast iron.


3. Float Mechanism: Replaceable, stainless steel.

4. Head and Seat: Hardened stainless steel.

5. Trap Type: Balanced pressure.

6. Thermostatic Bellows: Stainless steel or monel.

7. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F of

superheat and resisting water hammer without sustaining

damage.

8. Vacuum Breaker: Thermostatic with phosphor bronze

bellows, and stainless-steel cage, valve, and seat.

9. Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 psig.




D. Inverted Bucket Traps:

1. Body and Cap: Cast iron.


3. Head and Seat: Stainless steel.

4. Valve Retainer, Lever, and Guide Pin Assembly: Stainless

steel.

5. Bucket: Brass or stainless steel.

6. Strainer: Integral stainless-steel inlet strainer within

the trap body.

7. Air Vent: Stainless-steel thermostatic vent.

8. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.

2.5 THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS AND VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Thermostatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel.


3. Float, Valve, and Seat: Stainless steel.

4. Thermostatic Element: Phosphor bronze bellows in a

stainless-steel cage.


6. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

B. Vacuum Breakers:

1. Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel.


3. Sealing Ball, Retainer, Spring, and Screen: Stainless

steel.

4. O-Ring Seal: EPR.


6. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Use on outlet of condensate return pump only.

B. Stainless-Steel Bellows, Flexible Connectors:




1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible,

bronze, wire-reinforced, protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment

connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.

4. CWP Rating: 150 psig.

5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff duty valves at branch connections to steam

supply mains, at steam supply connections to equipment, and at

the outlet of steam traps.

B. Install safety valves on pressure-reducing stations and

elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to

nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,

Division 1, for installation requirements.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 full

port-ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap,

at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required

for system drainage.

C. Install valves according to Section 232213 Steam and Steam

Condensate Piping and Valves.

D. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to

valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as

indicated.

E. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final

connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.




F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric

fitting.

G. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-

reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install

NPS 3/4 nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection

of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff

connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

3.3 STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION

A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as

possible to connected equipment.

B. Install full-port ball valve, strainer, and union upstream

from trap; install union, check valve, and full-port ball

valve downstream from trap unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 STEAM OR CONDENSATE METER INSTALLATION

A. Install meters with lengths of straight pipe upstream and

downstream according to steam meter manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Provide data acquisition wiring. See Section 230923 "Direct

Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC"

3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close

to connected equipment.

B. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve.

If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is

required.

C. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close

to coil inlet connection.




STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS 232223 - 1

SECTION 232223 - STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes steam condensate pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include certified

performance curves and rated capacities, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for

each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating

point on curves. Include receiver capacity and material.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing

foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-STAGE, CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS WITH FLOOR-MOUNTED RECEIVER

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, packaged, electric-driven

pumps; with receiver, pumps, controls, and accessories

suitable for operation with steam condensate.







2. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label steam condensate

receivers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

B. Configuration: Duplex floor-mounted pump with receiver and

float switches; rated to pump 200 deg F (93 deg C) steam

condensate.

C. Receiver:

1. Floor mounted.

2. Close-grained cast iron.

3. Externally adjustable float switches.

4. Flanges for pump mounting.

5. Water-level gage and dial thermometer.

6. Pressure gage at pump discharge.

7. Bronze fitting isolation valve between pump and receiver.

8. Lifting eyebolts.

9. Inlet vent and an overflow.

10. Cast-iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning

bronze screen and large dirt pocket.

D. Pumps:

1. Centrifugal, close coupled, vertical design.

2. Permanently aligned.

3. Bronze fitted.

4. Replaceable bronze case ring.

5. Mechanical seals rated at 250 deg F (120 deg C).

6. Mounted on receiver flange.

E. Motor:




Equipment."

2. Enclosure: Open, dripproof.




F. Control Panel:

1. Factory wired between pumps and float switches, for

single external electrical connection.

2. Provide fused, control-power transformer if voltage

exceeds 230 V ac.

3. NEMA 2 enclosure with hinged door and grounding lug,

mounted on pump.

4. Motor controller for each pump.

5. Electrical pump alternator to operate pumps in lead-lag

sequence and allow both pumps to operate on receiver high

level.

6. Manual lead-lag control to override electrical pump

alternator and manually select the lead pump.

7. Momentary-contact "TEST" push button on cover for each

pump.

8. Numbered terminal strip.

9. Disconnect switch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual

locations of piping connections before pump installation.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps according to HI 1.1-1.2, HI 1.3, and HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance

including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and

accessories.




C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported

by pumps.

D. Install thermometers and pressure gages.

E. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install pumps on existing cast-in-place concrete

equipment base.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in

Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping" and

Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties."

B. Where installing piping adjacent to machine, allow space for


C. Install a globe and check valve and pressure gage before inlet

of each pump and a gate and check valve at pump outlet.

D. Pipe drain to nearest floor drain for overflow and drain

piping connections.

E. Install full-size vent piping to outdoors, terminating in 180-

degree elbow at point above highest steam system connection or

as indicated.

F. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and


G. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage


3.4 STARTUP SERVICE


startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to


2. Clean strainers.

3. Set steam condensate pump controls.

4. Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm

operation.




5. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations

and checks before starting:

a. Set float switches to operate at proper levels.

b. Set throttling valves on pump discharge for

specified flow.

c. Check motors for proper rotation.

d. Test pump controls and demonstrate compliance with

requirements.

e. Replace damaged or malfunctioning pump controls and

equipment.

f. Verify that pump controls are correct for required

application.

6. Start steam condensate pumps according to manufacturer's

written startup instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION



steam condensate pumps.




WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 232513 - 1

SECTION 232513 - WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following water treatment for closed-loop

hydronic systems:

1. Manual chemical-feed equipment.

2. Chemicals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment

operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling

power-limited circuits.

B. RO: Reverse osmosis.

C. TSS: Total suspended solids are solid materials, including

organic and inorganic, that are suspended in the water. These

solids may include silt, plankton, and industrial wastes.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories for

the following products:

1. Bypass feeders.






1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service

program to maintain water conditions required to inhibit

corrosion and scale formation for hydronic piping and

equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a

period of one year from date of Substantial Completion and

shall include the following:

1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment

recommendations.

2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems,

clean with detergents, and initially fill systems with

required chemical treatment prior to operation.

3. Periodic field service and consultation.

4. Customer report charts and log sheets.

5. Laboratory technical analysis.

6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning

safety and compliance with government regulations.

1.7 MANUFACTURERS

A. Contract with the owner’s current water treatment provider to

provide all cleaning services, chemicals, etc. required.


A. Water quality for hydronic systems shall minimize corrosion,

scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of

hydronic equipment without creating a hazard to operating

personnel or the environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at

Project site, hydronic system equipment material

characteristics and functional performance characteristics,

operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and

guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating, shall

have water qualities as recommended by the owner’s current

water treatment vendor.

D. Ensure system is always maintained according to the owners

water treatment vendor’s recommendations. When system is




refilled, ensure water treatment vendor is present to adjust

water chemistry into recommended range.

E. Contractor is responsible to pay the water treatment vendor

for all chemicals and service throughout the project.

1.9 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior

coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and

NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or

threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the

top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the

vessel.

1. Capacity: 5 gal.

2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.

1.10 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by owner’s current water-

treatment system vendor that are compatible with piping system

components and connected equipment and that can attain water

quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases,

level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended

clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require

servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-

mounting accessories to substrate.

B. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including

hot-water heating, and equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around

circulating pumps unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around

circulating pumps unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on

inlet, outlet, and drain below the feeder inlet.




4. Install a swing check on the inlet after the isolation

valve.

2.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for


B. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment

and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Comply

with requirements in Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping

Specialties."

C. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet

and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Section

230523 “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping”.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage owner’s current water

treatment vendor to test and inspect components, assemblies,

and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the

assistance of the owners current water treatment vendor:

1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment

installation, including piping and electrical

connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems

and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with

water, and are fully operational before introducing

chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and

calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of

hydronic systems' startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until

it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in

segments, submit separate report for each test, complete

with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended,

and replaced water piping until it has been tested and




approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed

before it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50

psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure

rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks

and loss in test pressure constitute defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest

piping until no leaks exist.

C. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass

tests and inspections.





METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Double-wall round ducts and fittings.

4. Sheet metal materials.

5. Duct liner.

6. Sealants and gaskets.

7. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 099100 “Exterior Painting” for field painting

requirements.

2. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements

for metal ducts.

3. Section 233119 "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-

fabricated casings for mechanical equipment.

4. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-

control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels,

turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet

metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction,

reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and




Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria

indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within

limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans,

elevations, sections, components, and attachments to

other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner

material, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top, bottom, and centerline of ducts.

5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on

Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers,

turning vanes, and access doors and panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and

building attachment and vibration isolation.

13. Submit shop drawings for all ductwork on the roof and in

the mechanical penthouse at 3/8”=1’ scale (minimum).

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses.

2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.




3. Reinforcement details and spacing.

4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers

and supports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on

indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according

to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints,"

for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,

materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other

provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according


Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams,"

for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,




D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other

Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to


Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,







2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3,

"Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-

pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according


Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for





C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according


Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for





D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to


Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and

Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class,

applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

one of the following (or equal):

1. United McGill Acousti-k27

B. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and

Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless

otherwise indicated.

1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate

according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse

Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,





and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible."

a. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in

Diameter: Flanged.

2. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate


Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction


3. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according


Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and

Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class,

applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,

duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.022-inch perforated galvanized sheet

steel having 3/32-inch- diameter perforations, with overall

open area of 23 percent.

D. Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner

complying with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials, and

with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Minimum R-Value: R-12 in accordance with IECC-2015 for

ASHRAE Zone 5A.

2. Total thickness: 3 in.

3. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.083 Btu x in./h x sq. ft.

x deg F conductivity> at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable

materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods

unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be

free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.




1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 for general single

wall duct construction.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Galvannealed Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvannealed Coating Designation: A60 for general for use

as outer duct on double wall duct.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized

suitable for field painting.

D. Factory- or Shop-Applied Antimicrobial Coating:

1. Apply to the surface of sheet metal that will form the

interior surface of the duct. An untreated clear coating

shall be applied to the exterior surface.

2. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an

NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have

a hardness of 2H, minimum, when tested according to

ASTM D 3363.

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread

index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when

tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

5. Shop-Applied Coating Color: White.

6. Antimicrobial coating on sheet metal is not required for

duct containing liner treated with antimicrobial coating.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel

plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for

lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for

lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.5 DUCT LINER

A. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-

cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II,

Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when

tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.




2. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer

and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

B. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-

11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing

upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

2. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with

adhesive.

3. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts

with air velocity of 2500 fpm.

4. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the

airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or

"Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall.

Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

b. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where

air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm or where

indicated.

5. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-

damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or

other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections)

or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure

buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or

welds.

2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning

characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum

flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.




6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and

negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both

PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum

sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone,

elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with

polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq.

ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg

pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or

fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to

factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.

2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated

steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized,

all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with

zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1,

"Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."




D. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-

tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel

shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel

shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel

coated with zinc chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct

locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size

ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment

sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct

systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved

on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in

direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and

horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building

lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns,

and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of

building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for

insulation thickness.




I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and

electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions

and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening

between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet

metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap

openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and

exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements

in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke

dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and

dust, and other foreign materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented,

scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and

uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp

edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a

No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed

welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by

welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the

arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports,

duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does

not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage

classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to


Flexible."





A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated

fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for

construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing

concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete

is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-

weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4

inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for

lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4

inches thick.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct

Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes

for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers

and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48

inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel

supports.

E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper

attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities


used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors

complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit

connections.




3.6 PAINTING

A. Apply paint to exterior of double walled supply and return

duct exposed outdoors on the roof. Paint materials and

application requirements are specified in Section 099100

"Exterior Painting".


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."

Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. New Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 4-Inch wg

or Higher: Test entire run of new duct from air

handling unit to the connection point to the

existing riser at shaft.

b. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or

Higher: Test entire run of new duct from air

handling unit to connection point to existing return

air shaft.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to

accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test

requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design

pressure of system or section being tested. If static-

pressure classes are not indicated, test system at

maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems

above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible

contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by

Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in

NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC

Systems."




a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris

collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75

mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass

tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing,

adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate

for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning

access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined

duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct

liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct

Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for

cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the

cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use

HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency

for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to

collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate

exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other

points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface

contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and

diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings,

plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums),

scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and

drive assemblies.




3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components

including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems,

spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and

condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes

except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning

methods that extract contaminants from within duct

systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated

continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to

downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned

are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to

interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of

metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992.

Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water

to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb

and straighten fins.

5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

6. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered

antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply

antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written

instructions after removal of surface deposits and

debris.

3.9 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593

"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as

otherwise indicated and as follows:




1. Outer shell of double wall ductwork to be Galvannealed

steel suitable for field painting.

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps,

and downstream side of Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

2. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units

to inlet side of air terminal units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.



C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps,

and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.



2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units from return air

shaft to unit:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.



D. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel .

E. Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation:

1. Supply Air Ducts: 3 inch thick. Minimum R-12.

2. Return Air Ducts: 3 inch thick. Minimum R-12.




F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2,

"Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter

ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter

ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and

Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct

Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments:

Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered

Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of

direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter:

Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter:

Welded.

G. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


"Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree

entry.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


"90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.




3.11 DUCTWORK PAINTING

A. Apply two coats of paint all exterior ductwork in accordance

with Section 230100 “Exterior Painting”.

B. Color to match custom AHU and penthouse walls.

1. Submit color samples to campus architect for approval.




HVAC CASINGS 233119 - 1

SECTION 233119 - HVAC CASINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Factory-fabricated, field-assembled, double-wall casings

for HVAC equipment.


A. Static-Pressure Classes:

1. Upstream from Fan(s): 2-inch wg.

B. Acoustical Performance:

1. NRC: 1.09 according to ASTM C 423.

2. STC: 34 according to ASTM E 90.

C. Structural Performance:

1. Casings shall be fabricated to withstand 133 percent of

the indicated static pressure without structural failure.

Wall and roof deflection at the indicated static pressure

shall not exceed 1/8 inch per foot of width.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Factory-fabricated casings.

2. Liners and adhesives.


B. Shop Drawings: For HVAC casings. Include plans, elevations,

sections, components, and attachments to other work.




1. Detail HVAC casing assemblies and indicate dimensions,

weights, loads, required clearances, method of field

assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Sheet metal thickness(es).

3. Reinforcement and spacing.

4. Seam and joint construction.

5. Access doors including frames, hinges, and latches.

6. Filter, coil, humidifier, and other apparatus being

installed in and mounted on casing.

7. Locations for access to internal components.

8. Hangers and supports including methods for building

attachment, vibration isolation, and casing attachment.

9. Interior lighting, including switches.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For acoustically critical casings, from

manufacturer.

1. Show sound-absorption coefficients in each octave band

lower than those scheduled when tested according to

ASTM C 423.

2. Show airborne sound transmission losses lower than those

scheduled when tested according to ASTM E 90.

C. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL CASING FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 9,

"Equipment and Casings," for acceptable materials, material

thicknesses, and casing construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other

imperfections.




B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Exterior Surface Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Interior Surface Galvanized Coating Designation:

a. Sections Not Exposed to Moisture: G90.

C. Factory- or Shop-Applied Antimicrobial Coating:

1. Apply to the interior sheet metal surfaces of casing in

contact with the airstream. Apply untreated clear coating

to the exterior surface.

2. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an

NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have

a hardness of 2H minimum when tested according to

ASTM D 3363.


index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50

according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

5. Applied Coating Color: Standard.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel

plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Sealing Requirement: SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class A. Seal all seams,

joints, connections, and abutments to building.

F. Penetrations: Seal all penetrations airtight. Cover with

escutcheons and gaskets, or fill with suitable compound so

there is no exposed insulation.

G. Access Doors: Fabricate access doors according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Figure 9-15, "Casing Access Doors - 2-inch wg (500 Pa)," and

Figure 9-16, "Casing Access Doors - 3-10-inch wg (750-2500

Pa)"; and according to pressure class of the plenum or casing

section in which access doors are to be installed.

1. Size: 20 by 54 inches.

2. Vision Panel: Double-glazed, wire-reinforced safety glass

with an airspace between panes and sealed with interior

and exterior rubber seals.




3. Hinges: Piano or butt hinges and latches, number and size



4. Latches: Minimum of two wedge-lever-type latches,

operable from inside and outside.

5. Neoprene gaskets around entire perimeters of door frames.

6. Doors shall open against air pressure.

2.2 MANUFACTURED CASINGS

A. Description: Double-wall, insulated, pressurized equipment

casing.

B. Double-Wall Panel Fabrication: Solid, galvanized sheet steel

exterior wall and perforated, galvanized sheet steel interior

wall; with space between wall filled with insulation.

1. Wall Thickness: 2 inches.

2. Fabricate with a minimum number of joints.

3. Weld exterior and interior walls to perimeter; to

interior, longitudinal, galvanized-steel channels; and to

box-end internal closures. Paint welds.

4. Sheet metal thickness shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

static-pressure class indicated for casing.

5. Double-Wall Casing Inner Panel: Perforated, galvanized

sheet steel having 3/32-inch- diameter perforations, with

overall open area of 23 percent.

6. Fill each panel assembly with insulating material that is

noncombustible, inert, mildew resistant and vermin proof

and that complies with NFPA 90A.

7. Fabricate panels with continuous tongue-and-groove or

self-locking joints effective inside and outside each

panel.

C. Trim Items: Fabricate from a minimum of 0.052-inch galvanized

sheet steel, furnished in standard lengths for field cutting.




2.3 CASING LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or

NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner

Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

a. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F

at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to surface

of the liner that will form the interior surface of

casing to act as a moisture repellent and an erosion-

resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested

for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use

in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or

NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or

zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-

discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to

suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-

inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed

from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized steel, with beveled

edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in

place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Shop or Factory Application of Casing Liner: Comply with


Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of casing

liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner

contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with

multiple layers of casing liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing

upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with

adhesive.

4. Fold and compress liner in corners of casings or cut and

fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.




5. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from

corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches

transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at

intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning

characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum

flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or

negative.

7. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

8. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel or

stainless steel.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single component, acid curing, silicone,

elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with

polyisobutylene plasticizer.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine for compliance with requirements for conditions

affecting installation and performance of HVAC casings.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and liners before

installation. Reject casings that are wet, moisture damaged,

or mold damaged.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install casings according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction


B. Apply sealant to joints, connections, and mountings.

C. Field-cut openings for pipe and conduit penetrations; insulate

and seal according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction


D. Support casings on floor or foundation system. Secure and seal

to base.

E. Support components rigidly with ties, braces, brackets, and

anchors of types that will maintain housing shape and prevent

buckling.

F. Align casings accurately at connections, with 1/8-inch

misalignment tolerance and with smooth interior surfaces.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Comply with requirements for cleaning in Section 233113 "Metal

Ducts."




AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Flange connectors.

3. Duct silencers.

4. Turning vanes.

5. Flexible connectors.

6. Flexible ducts.

7. Duct accessory hardware.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to

include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm

Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."




B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses,

and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated.

Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks,

roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel

reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts;

compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for

lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for

lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Standard leakage rating.

2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

3. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized

sheet steel.

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames

for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

6. Bearings:




a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg

or less shall have axles full length of damper

blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of

3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch

hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-

on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

B. Material: Galvanized steel.

C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.5 DUCT SILENCERS

A. General Requirements:

1. Factory fabricated.

2. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants,

packing materials, and accessory materials shall have

flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed

index not exceeding 50 when tested according to

ASTM E 84.

3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the

airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Shape:

1. Round straight with center bodies or pods.

C. Round Silencer Outer Casing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90,

galvanized sheet steel suitable for field painting.

1. Sheet Metal Thickness for Units 54 through 60 Inches in

Diameter: 0.064 inch thick.




D. Inner Casing and Baffles: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 galvanized

sheet metal, 0.034 inch thick, and with 1/8-inch- diameter

perforations.

E. Special Construction:

1. Suitable for outdoor use.

2. Outer casing suitable for field painting.

F. Connection Sizes: Match connecting ductwork unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism:

1. Controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned

resonators without absorptive media.

2. Dissipative type with fill material.

a. Fill Material: Moisture-proof nonfibrous material.

b. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill, and

heat sealed before assembly.

3. Lining: None.

H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate,

vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure

variations. Do not use mechanical fasteners for unit

assemblies.

1. Joints: Lock formed and sealed, continuously welded, or

flanged connections.

2. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or

lugs attached to frame in quantities and spaced to

prevent deflection or distortion.

3. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid

suspension.

I. Accessories:

1. Factory-installed end caps to prevent contamination

during shipping.

2. Removable splitters.




2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of

galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to

blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum

extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3,

"Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

C. Vane Construction: Double wall.

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according


Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-

3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and

thickness as indicated for duct pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge

and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct

pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and

foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges

and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and

two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and

two compression latches with outside and inside

handles.




d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous

and two compression latches with outside and inside

handles.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip

5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide,

0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-

thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected

ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double

coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360

lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer

film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg

negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film

supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass

insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg

negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.

4. Insulation R-Value: R-6.




C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex

screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3

through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct

material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow

insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of

length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based,

waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in


Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass

Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct

materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-

steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in

stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum

ducts.

C. Compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 includes

Section 6.4.3.3.3 - "Shutoff Damper Controls," restricts the

use of backdraft dampers, and requires control dampers for

certain applications. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of

exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust

fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and

exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where

dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install

dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and

terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.




E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting,

and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as

indicated.

G. Connect ducts to duct silencers rigidly.

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

I. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

J. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification

for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of

access door.

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch

lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change

directions.

M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum

60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and

balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose

of access door can be performed.

3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.



HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual

Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.



rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating

conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor

and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Roof curbs.

7. Fan speed controllers.






1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,

weights, loads, required clearances, method of field

assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that

are packaged with protective covering for storage and

identified with labels describing contents.

1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and



B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance

ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.

Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall

also comply with UL 762.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support

members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment

supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment

provided.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle;

square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement

permitting service and maintenance.

B. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined

blades.

C. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to

wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently

sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

D. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload

protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired

through an internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass

wire.

3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft

dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when

fan stops.

E. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-

1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to

inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to

suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 16 inches.

3. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.




2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service

factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors

specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated,

large enough so driven load will not require motor to

operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301,

"Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory

Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,

"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label

fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate,

pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and

efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory

Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices

specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for

HVAC."

C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated

hardware. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for

installation of roof curbs.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.




E. Label units according to requirements specified in

Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct

accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible

connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service

and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and


D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage



A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized

service representative to inspect components, assemblies,

and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting

devices and that connections to ducts and electrical

components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-

overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and

disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor

rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation

and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system,

align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension.

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.




8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire

and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in

fully open position.

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize

motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and

record motor voltage and amperage.

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-

control operators.

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as

specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and

balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design

airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.




AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 1

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Induction air terminal units.

2. Casing liner.


1. Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for

controller coordination requirements.

C. Coordination:

1. Controllers will be provided by the BAS contractor and

shipped to the Air Terminal Unit manufacturer for factory

mounting.

2. It is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to

ensure that the air terminal unit controllers are shipped

to the Air Terminal Unit manufacturer in a timely fashion

to prevent delays to the project schedule.


A. Product Data: For each type of air terminal unit.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and

finishes for air terminal units.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,

electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units.




1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting

details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate

dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method

of field assembly, components, and location and size of

each field connection.


4. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and

building attachment, and vibration isolation.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to


1. Include the following:

a. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air

volumes.

b. Instructions for adjusting software set points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION




B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

"Section 6 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."

2.2 INDUCTION AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with

mechanical induction nozzle, mixed air damper mounted on

casing and control components inside a protective metal

shroud.

B. Casing: Minimum 0.032” thick galvanized steel.

1. Casing shall be thermally and acoustically lined with

minimum ¾” thick fiberglass insulation which complies

with NFPA 90A, UL181, ASTM C1338, and ASTM C1071.




2. Casing Liner: Comply with requirements in "Casing Liner"

Article for fibrous-glass duct liner.

3. The primary jet flow nozzle shall be configured as a

variable aperture jet nozzle when modulating closed.

4. The primary air valve damper shall be heavy gauge metal,

pivoted in self-lubricating bushings.

5. The primary air valve shafts shall be solid half-inch

diameter zinc coated or stainless steel.

6. The port for induction air shall be controlled by a

multi-blade damper with zinc coated ½ inch solid steel

shaft, self-lubricating bearings, and heavy gauge metal

blades.

C. Induction nozzle:

1. The induction nozzle shall be constructed form heavy

gauge zinc-coated steel with a solid ½ inch zinc coated

shaft.

D. General:

1. Air Inlet: Round stub connection for duct attachment.

2. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.

3. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring

service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight

gasket.

E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and

self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: AHRI 880 rated, 2 percent of

nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally closed.

F. Induction Damper: Galvanized-steel, multiblade assembly with

self-lubricating bearings.

G. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls

system specified in Section 230900 "Instrumentation and

Controls for HVAC."

1. Electric Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered open, spring

return.

2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, VAV

controller with electronic airflow transducer with

multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory




calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having

the following features:

H. Control Sequence:

1. Damper controlling induced air from ceiling plenum opens

or closes in response to decrease or increase in primary

to ensure constant discharge airflow.

2. As heating requirement increases, fan energizes to draw

in warm plenum air.

a. Hot-water baseboard heat coil valve is opened.

2.3 CASING LINER

A. Casing Liner: Fibrous-glass duct liner, complying with

ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124,

"Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Minimum Thickness: 3/4 inch.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the

surface of the liner that will form the interior surface

of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-

resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested

for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use

in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or

NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to

AHRI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal

airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, and

AHRI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Ch. 5, "Hangers and Supports" and with




Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and

Equipment."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated

fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for

construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-

weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4

inches thick.

2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for

lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4

inches thick.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel

supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper

attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities


used.

3.2 TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard

for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain

sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow

space for service and maintenance.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for

connecting ducts to air terminal units.

C. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible

connectors complying with requirements in Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."




3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal

airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply

with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs

and labels.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized

service representative to test and inspect components,

assemblies, and equipment installations, including

connections.

B. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not

pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION



air terminal units.




HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 1

SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes shell-and-tube heat exchangers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.





B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate

dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of

field assembly, components, and location and size of each

field connection.

1. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages

and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube heat

exchanger. Documentation that shell-and-tube heat exchangers

comply with "TEMA Standards."

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including heat exchanger,

storage tank, and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other

materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Shell-and-Tube, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1) Tube Coil: Two year(s).

2) Other Components: Two year(s).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS


requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or

comparable product by one of the following:

1. API Heat Transfer Inc.

2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.

4. TACO Incorporated.

5. Thrush Company, Inc.

B. Description: Packaged assembly of tank, heat-exchanger coils,

and specialties.

C. Construction:










1. Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure

Vessels," Division 1.

2. Fabricate and label shell-and-tube heat exchangers to

comply with "TEMA Standards."

D. Configuration: U-tube with removable bundle.

E. Shell Materials: Steel.

F. Head:

1. Materials: Cast iron.

2. Flanged and bolted to shell.

G. Tube:

1. Seamless copper tubes.

2. Tube diameter is determined by manufacturer based on

service.

H. Tubesheet Materials: Steel.

I. Baffles: Steel.

J. Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials

compatible with heat-exchanger shell. Attach tappings to

shell before testing and labeling.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to

ASME B1.20.1.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to

ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges and

according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy

flanges.

K. Support Saddles:

1. Fabricated of material similar to shell.

2. Fabricate foot mount with provision for anchoring to

support.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hangers and Supports:

1. Custom, steel cradles for mounting on structural steel.




a. Minimum Number of Cradles: Two.

B. Miscellaneous Components for Steam Unit: Strainers, steam-

control valve, steam trap, valves, pressure gage, thermometer,

and piping.

C. Pressure Relief Valves: Bronze, ASME rated and stamped.

1. Pressure relief valve setting: 110 psig.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and for structural rigidity, strength,

anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat

exchangers.

B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual

locations of piping connections before equipment installation.



3.2 SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Heat-Exchanger Supports: Use factory-fabricated steel cradles

and supports specifically designed for each heat exchanger.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other

Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic

Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of

piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping

specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating

Piping" and Section 232216 Steam and Condensate Piping

Specialties."

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube

removal, service, and maintenance.




D. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for

service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping

for easy removal of heat exchangers.

E. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet

connections.

F. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid

connection and install pipe relief valves, full size of valve

connection, to floor drain.

G. Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet

connection.

H. Install hose end valve to drain shell.

I. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and inlet and outlet

piping, and install thermometer on heating-fluid inlet and

outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers

specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC

Piping."

J. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid

piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified

in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the


1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test

for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged

and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not

pass tests and inspections.


3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting

and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and

construction debris and repair damaged finishes.




3.6 DEMONSTRATION



heat exchangers.




CUSTOM CENTRAL STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313 - 1

SECTION 237313 CUSTOM OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Outdoor air handling units and components as scheduled and

shown on drawings.

B. Motor disconnects, motor starters, and variable frequency

drives.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions, Division 1, equipment schedules, and drawings

apply.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AMCA 99 – Standard Handbook

B. AMCA 210 – Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating

Purposes

C. AMCA 500 – Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters

D. AMCA 611-95 – Methods of Testing Airflow Measurement Stations

for Rating

E. ANSI/AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

F. ANSI/UL 900 – Test Performance of Air Filter Units

G. AHRI 260 – Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning

Equipment

H. AHRI 410 – Forced-Circulation Air Cooling and Air Heating Coils

I. ANSI/AHRI 430 – Performance Rating of Central-Station Air

Handling Units

J. ASHRAE 52.1/52.2 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air

Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size

K. ASHRAE 62 – Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality




L. ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings

M. ASTM-C 1338 – Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi

Resistance of Insulation Material and Facings.

N. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code (conductors, equipment and

raceways)

O. NFPA 90A – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation

Systems

P. SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards

Q. UL-181 – Mold Growth and Humidity Test

R. UL-1995 – Standard for Safety for Heating and Cooling Equipment


A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 25 years of experience in

designing, manufacturing, and servicing air-handling units.

B. The design indicated on the schedules and shown on the drawings

is based upon the products of the named manufacturer. Alternate

equipment manufacturers are acceptable if equipment meets

scheduled performance requirements and dimensional

requirements.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. If equipment is supplied by a manufacturer other than the one

named, coordinate with the Mechanical (single prime) Contractor

and affected subcontractors to ensure the specified performance

is met. This coordination shall include (but is not limited

to) the following:

1. Structural supports for units.

2. Unit supports and roof penetrations

3. Ductwork sizes and connection locations

4. Piping size and connection/header locations

5. Interference with existing or planned ductwork, piping and

wiring

6. Electrical power requirements and wire/conduit and over

current protection sizes.

7. Trap height requirements

B. The Mechanical (single prime) Contractor shall be responsible

for costs incurred by the Subcontractors, and Consulting




Engineers to accommodate units furnished by a manufacturer

other than manufacturer named as basis of design.

1.06 RATINGS AND CERTIFICATIONS

A. Air Handling Unit safety: ETL or UL 1995

B. Air Handling Unit energy use: ASHRAE 90.1

C. Fans: AMCA 210

D. Air Coils: AHRI 410

E. Air Handling Unit certification program: ANSI/AHRI 430

F. Filter media: ANSI/UL 900 listed Class I or Class II

G. Control wiring: NEC codes & ETL requirements

H. Motors: Federally mandated Energy Policy Act (EPACT).

I. Airflow Monitoring Stations: AMCA 611-95

1.07 SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED

A. Furnish fan performance ratings and fan curves with specified

operating point clearly plotted.

B. Furnish drawings indicating unit dimensions, required

clearances, field connection locations, wiring diagrams, and

shipping drawings.

C. Furnish performance report showing unit level performance data

including: fan(s), motor(s), coil(s) and other functional

components. Performance report shall also include unit casing

performance.

D. Furnish operation and maintenance data, including instructions

for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive

replacement, and condensate pan cleaning; spare parts lists,

and wiring diagrams.

E. Adjust and report performance ratings for the proper altitude

of operation.

F. Report air-handling unit performance ratings in accordance with

ANSI/AHRI-430 (static pressure, airflow, fan speed, and fan

brake horsepower).




G. Report static pressure profiles by component section.

H. Report coil ratings in accordance with AHRI-410 (capacities and

pressure drops).

I. Report unweighted octave band AHU sound power for inlets and

outlets rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 260. Provide

eight data points, the first for the octave centered at 63 Hz,

and the eighth centered at 8,000 Hz. Manufacturer shall not

use sound estimates based on bare fan data (AMCA ratings), nor

use calculations like the substitution method based on AHRI 260

tests of other AHU products. Provide data for inlets and

outlets as scheduled. Report unweighted casing radiated sound

power over the same 8 octave bands in accordance with ISO 9614

Parts 1&2 and ANSI S12.12.

J. Airflow measuring device performance shall be certified and

rated in accordance with AMCA-611. Report data in accordance

with AMCA-611. Provide AMCA Certified Rating Seal for Airflow

Measurement Performance.

K. Report panel deflection at +/-10” w.g., stated in terms of

‘L/X’ where ‘L’ is the casing panel length and ‘X’ is a

constant provided by the AHU manufacturer.

L. Report casing leakage rate at +/-10” w.g., specified in terms

of percentage of design airflow.

M. Report weight loads and distributions by component section.

N. Report product data for filter media, filter performance data,

filter assembly, and filter frames.

O. Report electrical requirements for power supply wiring

including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring,

clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed

wiring.

P. Report motor electrical characteristics.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE and handling

A. Comply with ASHRAE 62, Section 5 (mold and corrosion resistant

casings, filters upstream of wetted surfaces, and drain pan

design).

B. Comply with ASHRAE 62, Section 7 (practices to be followed

during construction and startup). Protect equipment from

moisture by appropriate in-transit and on-site procedures.




C. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for handling, unloading

and storage.

D. Protect, pack, and secure loose-shipped items within the air-

handling units. Include detailed packing list of loose-shipped

items, including illustrations and instructions for

application.

E. Protect, pack and secure controls devices, motor control

devices and other electronic equipment. Do not store electronic

equipment in wet or damp areas even when they are sealed and

secured.

F. Enclose and protect control panels, electronic or pneumatic

devices, and variable frequency drives. Do not store equipment

in wet or damp areas even when they are sealed and secured.

G. Seal openings to protect against damage during shipping,

handling and storage.

H. Wrap units with a tight sealing membrane. Wrapping membrane

shall cover entire AHU during shipping and storage. Cover

equipment, regardless of size or shape. Alternatively AHU must

be fully tarped for shipment and storage.

I. Wrap equipment, including electrical components, for protection

against rain, snow, wind, dirt, sun fading, road

salt/chemicals, rust and corrosion. Keep equipment clean and

dry.

J. Clearly mark AHU sections with unit tag number, segment

sequence number, and direction of airflow. Securely affix

safety-warning labels.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one set of filters for balancing, and one additional

set for final turnover to owner.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty for 24 months from date of substantial

completion. Warranty shall cover manufacturer defects.

Warranty work shall be performed by manufacturer’s factory-

trained and factory-employed technician.

B. Parts associated with routine maintenance, such as belts and

air filters shall be excluded.




1.11 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent,

until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings

lubricated, and fans have been test run under observation.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s start-up requirements to ensure safe

and correct operation and integrity of warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS


requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or

comparable custom product by one of the following:

1. Temtrol, div. of Nortek Air Solutions

2. Haakon Industries

3. Air Enterprises, Inc.

4. Airtherm; a Mestek company.

5. Buffalo Air Handling.

6. Carrier Custom; a member of the United Technologies

Corporation Family.

7. Dunham-Bush, Inc.

8. Engineered Air.

9. Mammoth Inc.

10. Trane Custom TCFS, div of Ingersoll Rand Inc.

2.02 UNIT CASINGS

A. Unit Casing Performance

1. Leakage shall be no more than 1/2% of rated unit CFM at +/-

10” static pressure. Manufacturer shall perform a factory

leakage test on at least one fully assembled unit.

Customer shall select which unit to test. Perform test at

10” static pressure. If unit fails at the factory,

manufacturer shall seal and retest unit until it meets

specified performance.

a. Manufacturer shall fabricate blanking plates to cover

the return air inlet opening, outside air intake

opening, relief air outlet opening, and the supply air

outlet opening. Manufacturer shall ship these blanking




plates with the unit to facilitate the field leakage

testing.

2. Deflection shall be no more than L/240 of panel length at

+/- 10” static pressure. Manufacturer shall perform a

factory deflection test on at least one unit. Customer

shall select which unit to test. Measure deflection on the

largest wall panel. Perform test at 10” static pressure.

If unit fails, manufacturer shall add structural support

required to achieve specified performance.

3. Thermal performance:

a. Unit wall shall not sweat with interior air temperature

of 53.0°F and exterior air at 90.2/73.2 db/wb (1%

ASHRAE Design conditions for Trenton Mercer Airport.)

b. R-value of wall shall be R-13 at the center of panel.

B. 2” foam injected thermal break walls Construct walls with

interior and exterior sheet metal surfaces, welded internal

post structure, and 2” of injected foam insulation. Foam board

or fiberglass insulation is not acceptable.

1. Interior Liner:

a. Galvanized Steel, G90 shall be 22 ga.

2. Exterior surface

a. Pre-painted galvanized steel, G90 shall be 18 ga.

3. Internal Post Structure: Formed galvanized 16 ga. steel C-

channel. Structure shall be fully welded. Post spacing

shall be designed to provide L/240 wall deflection at +/-

10” w.g. Maximum post spacing shall be 24” on centers.

4. Fasteners

a. Exterior Fasteners

1) For outdoor units use self tapping series 400

stainless steel sheet metal screws to fasten

exterior sheet metal walls to post frame structure

on 18” centers

b. Interior Fasteners

1) For Galvanized interior liner: use self tapping

rust inhibited sheet metal screws to fasten

interior and exterior sheet metal walls to post

frame structure on 27” centers.

5. Casing Joints: Joints shall be mechanically fastened.

Fasteners shall not extend from the outside to the inside

of the unit. Use angle to fasten and seal walls at

corners, floors, and roofs.

6. Sealing: Seal joints with polyurethane water resistant

sealant.

7. Mill Finish for galvanized steel casings: Immediately

after cleaning and pre-treating, factory apply high build




(3 to 5 mils) alkyd enamel. Coating shall pass ASTM B-117

500 hour salt spray test. Color shall be as selected by

owner. Submit color chart with shop drawings for color

selection by owner.

8. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream

shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2013.

C. Roofs

1. Construction of the roof shall be identical to the wall

construction specified.

2. Unit roof for outdoor units are to be sloped a minimum

pitch of ¼” per foot.

3. The roof shall overhang all side and end panels to prevent

precipitation drainage from streaming down the unit wall

panels. Gutter systems are not acceptable.

4. Roofs less than 12’ wide shall be sloped to the non-door

side of the unit; roofs 12’ wide and wider shall be peaked

in the center and sloped to both sides of the unit.

5. Roof construction shall accommodate a minimum snow-load of

30 lb/ft2.

6. Roof shall be designed to hold a 300lb load for service and

maintenance.

7. The roofing system shall consist of a white 100% acrylic

elastomeric coating with mildewcide. Coating shall be a

minimum 20 mils thick. Coating shall meet the following

requirements:

a. CRRC Solar Index Rating of 112 per ASTM E1980-01

b. CRRC Initial Solar Reflectance of 0.89; 0.81 after 3

years

c. CRRC Initial Thermal Emittance of 0.89; 0.87 after 3

years

d. Fungi Resistance per ASTM G21 of zero growth

8. Outdoor roofs supplied with non-sloped roofs or standing

seam roof systems are not acceptable.

9. For all outdoor roof duct connections provide a minimum

1.5” duct flange.

D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive

and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of section

panels downstream from, and including, the cooling-coil

section.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.




b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for

adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding

attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied

as recommended by manufacturer and without causing

leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have

air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant

coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or

fabric depending on service-air velocity.

3. Location and Application: Encased between outside and

inside casing.

E. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-

wall, 2-inch insulated panels of same material type and

thickness as unit casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels:

a. Fasteners: Attached to unit casing with tek screws

with EPDM washers on maximum 9-inch centers.

b. Gasket: 3/4” wide x 1/8” thick PVC gasket applied

around entire perimeters of panel frames and the access

opening.

c. Construction: Factory shall provide double sided tape

where liner is attached to internal supports.

3. Access Doors:

a. Frames: Type 6063-T6 aluminum extrusion, with thermal

break for "no through metal" construction, welded at

the corners and attached to the unit casing with

plated, stainless steel hardware.

b. Hinges: A full height stainless-steel piano hinge with

minimum two roller cam latches per door, operable from

inside and outside. Rotating knife-edge or “paw”

latches are not acceptable. Provide galvanized, Z-type

safety latch for all outward opening access doors

opening with unit pressure.

c. Handles: Glass fiber reinforced, UV rated,

padlockable, nylon polyamide as manufactured by Allegis

Corporation.

d. Gasket: EPDM-sponge, applied around entire perimeters

of panel frames.

e. Viewports: Provide 12”x12”, viewing window centered

horizontally in each access door with wire-reinforced



CUSTOM CENTRAL STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313 -

10

safety glass. Viewport height shall be approximately

5’-0” above the floor of the unit.

f. Test Ports: Ventlok No. 699 instrument test holes

installed in door locations as required to measure

pressure drops across unit.

g. Rain Lip: Provide rain lip of same material type as

unit casing attached with tek screws above all access

doors.

F. Pipe-Chase:

1. Air handling unit(s) shall be provided with an external

pipe-chase consisting of casing equivalent to the unit

casing, having a minimum thermal conductivity R of 12 hr-

ft2-°F/BTU.

a. Pipe-chase shall be 36” wide to provide sufficient

space for coil connections to be installed without

interference.

b. [Loose-shipped pipe-chase enclosures shall be provided

with lifting lugs for field installation (if any loose

shipped).]

c. Pipe-chase shall be provided with 24” doors. Doors

shall be the same construction as the main unit doors.

Door quantities shall match contract drawings.

d. Pipe chase floor construction shall be the same as that

of the unit.

G. Floors:

1. Floor shall be 0.125-in aluminum diamond plate full seam

welded to the base.]

Floor shall be insulated with 2-inch polyurethane spray

foam insulation.

2. Floor shall be thermally isolated from welded base frame

members (perimeter and internal supports). Construction

without thermally isolated floor and walls shall not be

acceptable.

a. Floor shall have upturned lip with fully welded seams,

and be capable of holding 2-inch of water. Construction

allowing screws or bolts to penetrate floor shall not

be allowed. All floor openings shall have a fully

welded 2” upturned lip.

b. Each section shall be equipped with drain connection to

facilitate washdown and maintenance. Drain connection

shall be extended through the base and have a removable

cap installed.

c. All internal equipment shall be provided with a minimum

2-inch high base to raise equipment and components off

the unit floor for housekeeping.




11

3. Floor Paint:

a. None.

4. Floor Drains:

a. Factory shall provide 1-1/4” floor drain in each

section.

b. Floor drain piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel

extended from the floor drain and terminated with a 1-

1/4” MPT threaded connection to the exterior through

the unit base.

H. Baserails:

1. Type ASTM A36 welded structural steel c-channel, 10-inch

height, with cross supports spaced at regular intervals and

removable lifting lugs.

2. Factory applied high build (3 to 5 mils) alkyd enamel.

Coating shall pass ASTM B-117 500 hour salt spray test.

Color shall be as specified by Owner.

2.1 FAN AND DRIVE SECTION

A. Fan and drive assemblies shall be statically and dynamically

balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated

fan speed and motor horsepower.

B. Shafts shall be designed for continuous operation at maximum-

rated fan speed and motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable

alignment.

1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway.

Ship with a protective coating.

2. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes

contact with the bearing.

3. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first

critical speed at top of fan's speed range.

C. Centrifugal fan housings shall be of heavy gauge, continuously

welded construction. Housings with lock seams or partially

welded construction are not acceptable. Housings shall be

suitably braced to prevent vibration or pulsation. Housings

shall have spun, aerodynamically designed inlet cones or inlet

venturies for smooth airflow into the wheels.

1. Housings shall be reinforced with rigid bracing to increase

structural integrity. The support angles shall be

intermittently welded and caulked between welds to prevent

bleed-through corrosion.




12

2. The entire fan assembly, excluding the shaft, shall be

thoroughly degreased and deburred before application of a

rust-preventative primer. After the fan is completely

assembled, a finish coat of paint shall be applied to the

entire assembly. The fan shaft shall be coated with a

petroleum-based rust protectant.

3. Housing shall be attached to the fan bulkhead wall with

metal-edged flexible duct connector.

4. Flexible connector shall be factory fabricated with a 3

inch wide (76-mm) fabric strip attached to two strips of 3

inch wide (76-mm), 24 gauge, galvanized-steel sheet.

a. Flexible connector fabric shall be woven

nylon/polyester blend with a vinyl coating. Fabrics,

coatings, and adhesives shall comply with NFPA 701, and

NFPA 90A & 90B.

1) Fabric Minimum Weight: 22 oz./sq. yd. (746

g/sq. m).

2) Fabric Tensile Strength: 240 lb (1067 N) in the

warp and 220 lb (978 N) in the fill.

3) Fabric Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 180

deg F (Minus 40 to plus 82 deg C).

4) Fabric Pressure Resistance: Minus 10 in-w.g. to

plus 15 in-w.g. (Minus 2.5 kPa to plus 3.7 kPa).

D. Plenum fan housings shall be steel frame and panel; fabricated

without fan scroll and volute housing. All single width single

inlet (SWSI) plenum fans shall have airfoil blades. Flat plate

blades shall not be acceptable. SWSI fans shall be provided

with inlet screens and wheel guards.

E. Airfoil, centrifugal fan wheels shall be smooth-curved inlet

flange, backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades

continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or

cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with

set screws. All airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA Seal.

Airfoil fan performance shall be based on tests made in

accordance with AMCA standard 210 and comply with the

requirements of AMCA standard 300 for inlet sound and outlet

sound. In addition, all airfoil wheels shall comply with AMCA

standard 2408-69. Fans shall be run tested at the specified

operating speed prior to shipment. Each fan shall be

dynamically balanced as a complete assembly in accordance with

ISO-1940, to achieve Balance Quality Grade of at least G6.3 for

the rotating assembly. Maximum vibration shall be within the

limits of ANSI/AMCA 204 Fan Application Category BV-3. Balance




13

readings shall be taken electronically in the axial, vertical,

and horizontal directions. Records of each fan balance shall

be made available upon request.

F. Fan Shaft Bearings:

1. Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease lubricated, spherical

roller or adapter mounted anti-friction ball, self-

aligning, pillow block type.

2. All bearings shall have a guaranteed minimum L50 life time

of 200,000 hours (as per AFBMA standards). Bearing ratings

are to be based on the fan's maximum operating speed and

horsepower.

3. All fan bearings shall be provided with grease fittings.

G. Belt drives shall be factory mounted, with adjustable alignment

and belt tensioning, and shall have a 1.5 service factor.

1. Sheave shall be machined from a close grain cast iron and

statically balanced by the manufacturer.

2. Fan drives shall be fixed pitch.

3. Motor drives shall be fixed pitch.

4. Drive belts shall be a V type. All drive belts shall be

precision molded raw edge construction. Belts shall be oil

resistant, heat resistant, non-sparking, and non-static; in

matched sets for multiple-belt drives.

5. Belt guards shall comply with requirements specified by

OSHA 1910.212 for machinery and machine guarding.

H. Each fan shall be provided with an individual industrial grade

low leak back-draft damper. Frame shall be minimum 9" deep x 2"

(229 x 51) flanged 12 (2.8) gage galvanized steel channel. The

blades shall be maximum 7" (178) wide, minimum .080 (2) thick,

6063T5 extruded aluminum airfoil shaped with integral

structural reinforcing tube running full length of each blade.

Damper blades shall be equipped with silicone rubber seals

mechanically locked into extruded blade slots. Adhesive type

seals are not acceptable. Adhesive type seals are not

acceptable. Dampers shall be equipped with vinyl jamb seals for

low leakage application. Wind stop type seals are not

acceptable. Axles shall be minimum 3/4" (19) diameter with

machined edge to provide positive locking connection to blades.

Full round axles are not acceptable. Bearings shall be ball

style pressed into frame. Linkage shall be minimum 3/16" thick

3/4" (5 x 19) bar located on face of blade in airstream.

Submittal must include leakage, pressure drop, and maximum

pressure data based on AMCA Publication 500 testing.




14

I. Fans shall be factory mounted with 2 inch (50 mm) deflection

spring isolators.

1. SWSI plenum fans shall include thrust restraints to resist

horizontal motion due to thrust during start-up, and to

mitigate fan assembly vibration in the horizontal plane

during operation.

J. Each fan shall be provided with an Airflow Measuring System

(AFMS) consisting of a piezometer ring mounted in the throat

and a static pressure tap mounted on the face of the inlet

cone. A differential pressure transducer [and an analog

display] shall be provided. Transducer shall have a field

configurable 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC output, as well as a 4-20 mA

output. Transducer shall have a standard accuracy of ±1% FS.

AFMS shall not obstruct the airflow in any way and shall have

no effect on fan airflow performance, static pressure, or sound

power levels. Default motor characteristics are specified in

Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."

2.2 DIRECT-DRIVE FANS SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced

and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan

speed and motor horsepower.

1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated

fan speed and motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable

alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with

keyway. Ship with a protective coating.

b. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft

makes contact with the bearing.

c. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first

critical speed at top of fan's speed range.

2. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a 3 inch wide

(76-mm) fabric strip attached to two strips of 3 inch wide

(76-mm), 24 gauge, galvanized-steel sheet

a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Woven nylon/polyester blend

with a vinyl coating. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

shall comply with NFPA 701, and NFPA 90A & 90B.

1) Fabric Minimum Weight: 22 oz./sq. yd. (746

g/sq. m).




15

2) Fabric Tensile Strength: 240 lb (1067 N) in the

warp and 220 lb (978 N) in the fill.

3) Fabric Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 180

deg F (Minus 40 to plus 82 deg C).

4) Fabric Pressure Resistance: Minus 10 in-w.g. to

plus 15 in-w.g. (Minus 2.5 kPa to plus 3.7 kPa).

B. Plenum Fan Housings: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without

fan scroll and volute housing. All single width single inlet

(SWSI) plenum fans shall have airfoil blades. Flat plate blades

shall not be acceptable. SWSI fans shall be provided with fan

inlet screens and wheel guards.

1. Arrangement 4 direct drive plenum fans shall include wheels

constructed entirely of aluminum to reduce weight and

vibration. Airfoil blades shall be extruded aluminum, and

continuously welded around all edges.

2. Direct drive plenum fan wheels are attached to the motor

shaft using taper lock bushings. The wheel and fan inlet

are matched and have precise running tolerances for maximum

performance and operating efficiency.

C. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Smooth-curved inlet flange,

backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades

continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or

cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with

set screws. All airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA Seal.

Airfoil fan performance shall be based on tests made in

accordance with AMCA standard 210 and comply with the

requirements of AMCA standard 300 for inlet sound and outlet

sound. In addition, all airfoil wheels shall comply with AMCA

standard 2408-69. Fans shall be run tested at the specified

operating speed prior to shipment. Each fan shall be

dynamically balanced as a complete assembly in accordance with

ISO-1940, to achieve Balance Quality Grade G6.3 for the

rotating assembly. Maximum vibration shall be within the

limits of ANSI/AMCA 204 Fan Application Category BV-3. Balance

readings shall be taken electronically in the axial, vertical,

and horizontal directions. Records of each fan balance shall

be made available upon request.

D. Internal Vibration Isolation: Fans shall be factory mounted

with 2 inch (50 mm) deflection spring isolators.

1. SWSI plenum fans shall include thrust restraints to resist

horizontal motion due to thrust during start-up, and to




16

mitigate fan assembly vibration in the horizontal plane

during operation.

2.3 MOTORS

A. All fan motors shall comply with NEMA and IEEE for temperature

rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section

"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Enclosure Type shall be open drip proof (ODP).

2. All fan motors shall be NEMA Premium™ efficient motors as

defined in NEMA MG 1.

3. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty at full load at

40°C ambient temperature rise.

4. Motor sizes shall be as indicated. If not indicated, large

enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in

service factor range above 1.15.

5. Motors voltage, phase, and speed shall be as scheduled on

project drawings.

6. Motors shall be "inverter ready", complying with NEMA STD

MG1 PART 31.4.4.2

7. Motors shall have an insulation Class F.

8. Motors shall include a shaft grounding ring.

2.4 COILS

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Provide coils manufactured by AHU manufacturer, except

where noted in contract documents.

2. Coils shall meet or exceed performance scheduled on

drawings.

1. When applicable, provide coils with performance certified

in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 for coil capacity and

pressure drop. Circuit coils such that the fluid velocity

is within the range of certified rating conditions at de-

sign flow.

2. Provide heating and cooling coils with a maximum face veloci-

ty as scheduled. Face velocity calculations shall be based

on the finned area of the coil.




17

3. Provide heating and cooling coils with maximum pressure drop,

number of rows and fin spacing as per drawing schedules.

4. Provide cooling coil drain pan that is sufficient to contain

coil condensate. Drain pan shall be 16 ga. 304 Stainless

steel construction and extend a minimum of 6 inches down-

stream of leaving face of the Coil to allow for condensate

pan access and maintenance and meet requirements for ASHRAE

62-2007. IAQ drain pan must slope in 3 directions and have

single 304 Stainless steel 1.5 inch connection for trapping

at jobsite.

5. Provide a minimum of 24 inches clearance between preheat and

cooling coil banks and provide access door as shown on draw-

ings.

6. Locate access doors near coils connections to provide minimum

clearance of 2 inches for field installed external piping in-

sulation. Space shall allow a minimum of 90 degrees of door

swing.

7. Provide coil segment casing that meets or exceeds casing

thermal performance of the unit. Provide coil pull panel that

are easily removable with no special tools. Coils shall be

removable from the side of the AHU. For units with multiple

stacked coils, provide a G-90 steel 304 stainless steel

stacking rack to allow individual coils to be removed from

side of AHU without disturbing any other coils.

8. Provide Heating coils built in their own full perimeter frame

G-90 steel. Tube sheets on each end shall have fully drawn

collars to support and protect tubes. Horizontal coil casing

and support members shall allow moisture to drain. When

required, intermediate vertical coils support will be same

material as casing. Bulkhead support shall be G-90 steel and

shall not block finned area.

9. Provide Cooling coils built in their own full perimeter frame

G-90 steel. Tube sheets on each end shall have fully drawn

collars to support and protect tubes. Horizontal coil casing

and support members shall allow moisture to drain. When

required, intermediate vertical coils support will be same

material as casing. Bulkhead support shall be G-90 steel and

shall not block finned area.

10. Provide an intermediate drain pan G-90 steel on stacked

cooling coils or any cooling coil taller than 48 inches




18

finned height. Intermediate drain pan shall slope in a mini-

mum of two planes and provide copper downspouts to lower

drain pan.

11. Water and glycol coils shave have a 1/4" FPT plugged

vent/drain tap on each connection. Circuiting shall allow

draining and venting when installed. Extend vent, drain,

and coil connections to an accessible interior location.

12. Water and glycol coils shall be operable at 250 psig

working pressure and up to 300 F. Factory test water and

glycol coils with 325 psig compressed air under water.

13. Provide water, coils with a tube OD of 5/8 inch.

Mechanically expand tubes to form fin bond and provide

burnished, work-hardened interior surface. Wall thickness

available in 0.035”.

14. Return bends shall be brazed.

15. Provide water coil headers made of seamless copper tubing.

Pipe connections shall be steel threaded MPT Header

connections, (tubes and piping connections) shall be silver-

brazed or TIG welded. On units with Pipe chases/vestibule or

90 deg connections, offset coil connection a minimum of 6” to

allow room for field connections. With 6” offset coils

provide ½” vent and drains on coil headers

16. Provide coils with die-formed, continuous Aluminum fins.

Fins shall have fully drawn collars to accurately space fins

and protect tubes. For low air pressure drop, and easier

cleaning, provide a Flat fin (not sine wave) of fin thickness

of .010 inches

2.5 AIR FILTRATION

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1. Filters shall be manufactured by Koch, Camfil/Farr, or

Flanders.

2. Provide a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV)

according to ASHRAE 52.2.

3. Provide filter segments with filters and frames as

scheduled.




19

4. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular

orientation, with access doors as indicated on drawings.

Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from

access plenum.

5. Filter media shall be in compliance with UL900.

B. Extended-Surface, 2” Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, pleated type.

2. Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm).

3. Recommended Final Resistance: 1 inches wg (Pa).

4. MERV (ASHRAE 52.2): 8

5. Media: Synthetic blended fibers formed into deep-V-shaped

self-supporting pleats requiring no metal reinforcement.

6. Media-Grid Frame: Moisture-resistant beverage board frame.

7. Koch model Multi-Pleat Elite SC or equivalent.

C. Extended-Surface, 4" Minipleat Filters:

1. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, self-supporting

type

2. Thickness: 4 inches (100 mm)

3. Recommended Final Resistance: 1.5 inches wg (Pa)

4. MERV (ASHRAE 52.2): 13.

5. Media: Wet-laid, gradient density, micro-fiberglass with

hot melt adhesive beads to maintain pleat uniformity and

spacing

6. Filter-Media Frame: Moisture resistant beverage board die

cuts, double wall, with retainer supports bonded to the

media pack for rigidity

7. Koch model MicroMAX or equivalent

D. Filter Gage across each filter:

1. 3-1/2-inch- (90-mm-) diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in

metal case.

2. Vent valves.

3. Black figures on white background.

4. Front recalibration adjustment.

5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy.

6. Range: 0- to 2.0-inch wg (0 to 500 Pa).

7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral

compression fittings, 1/4-inch (6-mm) aluminum tubing, and

2- or 3-way vent valves.




20

2.6 DAMPERS

A. Control Dampers: Dampers shall be parallel-blade, leakage Class

1A design with a leakage rate that shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq.

ft. (15 L/s· m2) at 1 in. w.g. (249.09 Pa) pressure differential

when tested according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory Methods for

Testing Dampers for Rating." Dampers shall be provided with

galvanized-steel airfoil-shaped, single-piece blades with

flexible metal compressible type jamb seals, extruded

Ruskiprene blade edge seals, and stainless-steel sleeve

bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame. Axles

shall be hexagonal positively locked into the damper blade.

Dampers shall be provided with a jackshaft.

B. Airflow Monitoring Dampers: Dampers shall be parallel-blade,

leakage Class 1A design with a leakage rate that shall not

exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. (15 L/s· m2) at 1 in. w.g. (249.09 Pa)

pressure differential when tested according to AMCA 500,

"Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating." Dampers

shall have galvanized-steel airfoil-shaped, single-piece blades

with flexible metal compressible type jamb seals, extruded

Ruskiprene blade edge seals, and stainless-steel sleeve

bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame. Dampers

shall be provided with a jackshaft. Airflow monitoring stations

shall be tested to AMCA Standard 610 and 611 and shall be

qualified to bear the AMCA Ratings Seal for Airflow Measurement

Station Air Performance.

1. Damper shall include airfoil shaped, heavy gage, anodized

aluminum monitoring blades which are fixed within the

damper frame and contain air pressure sensing ports.

2. Damper shall include a 3000 series aluminum alloy honeycomb

air straightener contained in a galvanized steel sleeve

attached to the monitoring blade frame.

3. Airflow Monitoring Options:

a. 25% / 75% Split: Damper shall consist of two sections

split in a 25%/75% min/max arrangement. Both the 25%

and the 75% damper sections shall include independent

monitoring blades and air straightener.




21

2.7 TESTING

A. Factory performance to be witnessed by owner’s representative.

Owner’s representative shall select one unit, at time of

release, to be tested. Manufacturer shall notify contractor

and/or owner 14 days prior to test for witnessing. (Travel

expenses are not part of this contract). A written report

shall be provided showing the test results and the test methods

used.

B. Factory Panel Deflection Test: The unit manufacturer shall

provide a factory deflection test on one unit. Casing panel

deflection shall not exceed L/240 at +/- 10” w.g. (or as

required by AHRI 1350.) ‘L” is defined as the panel span length

and ‘L/X’ is the deflection at panel midpoint. Measurements

shall be taken along the vertical seam of the largest panel on

the side.

C. Factory Leak Testing: The unit manufacturer shall provide a

factory leak test on one unit across the cabinet exterior

walls. Casing leakage shall not exceed 0.5% of design CFM at

+/-10” w.g. (or as required by AHRI 1350.)

D. Should a unit fail a test, the unit shall be treated with a

permanent remedy at manufacturer’s expense until test is

successfully passed.

2.8 LIGHTS AND OUTLETS

A. Lights

1. Vapor Resistant Pendant: Factory shall provide vapor

resistant pendant, marine type light fixture with clear

globe, metal guard, and 100W incandescent bulb in segments

and quantity as noted on drawings.

2. Factory shall wire each light fixture to a separate 120v

switch located near the access door of the segment with the

light fixture.

B. Outlets

1. Factory shall provide three 15A GFI duplex outlets mounted

in a weatherproof enclosures. Outlets shall be wired to a

common 120V circuit and spaced equally on the door side of

the unit.




22

2.9 HOODS AND LOUVERS

A. Louvers

1. Provide 16 ga., galvanized steel, stationary type,

drainable blade louver with downspouts in the jamb and

mullions and 1/4” sq. galvanized mesh birdscreen. Blades

shall be housed inside a 16 ga. galvanized steel frame

flush mounted to the unit exterior. Louver to be pre-

painted with baked enamel finish in manufacturer’s standard

Champagne.

B. Weather Hood

1. Provide weather hood of same material type and thickness as

unit exterior skin with 1/4” sq. galvanized mesh

birdscreen.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment per industry standards, applicable codes, and

manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install AHUs on structural steel base, as shown on drawings.

C. Install AHUs with manufacturer’s recommended clearances for

access, coil pull, and fan removal.

D. Provide one complete set of filters for testing, balancing, and

commissioning. Provide second complete set of filters at time

of transfer to owner.

E. Install AHU plumb and level. Connect piping and ductwork

according to manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Install pipe chases per manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Insulate plumbing associated with drain pan drains and

connections.

H. Install insulation on all staggered coil piping connections,

both internal and external to the unit.




23


A. Store per AHU manufacturer’s written recommendations. Store

AHUs indoors in a warm, clean, dry place where units will be

protected from weather, construction traffic, dirt, dust, water

and moisture. If units will be stored for more than 6 months,

follow manufacturer’s instruction for long-term storage.

B. Rig and lift units according manufacturer’s instructions.

3.03 AHU INSPECTION

A. Hire manufacturer’s factory-trained and factory-employed

service technician to perform an inspection of unit and

installation prior to startup. Technician shall inspect and

verify the following as a minimum:

1. Damage of any kind.

2. Level installation of unit.

3. Proper reassembly and sealing of unit segments at shipping

splits.

4. Tight seal around perimeter of unit at the roof curb

5. Installation of shipped-loose parts, including filters,

air hoods, bird screens and mist eliminators.

6. Completion and tightness of electrical, ductwork and pip-

ing.

7. Tight seals around wiring, conduit and piping penetrations

through AHU casing.

8. Supply of electricity from the building’s permanent

source.

9. Integrity of condensate trap for positive or negative

pressure operation.

10. Condensate traps charged with water.

11. Removal of shipping bolts and shipping restraints.

12. Sealing of pipe chase floor(s) at penetration locations.

13. Tightness and full motion range of damper linkages (oper-

ate manually).

14. Complete installation of control system including end de-

vices and wiring.

15. Cleanliness of AHU interior and connecting ductwork.

16. Proper service and access clearances.

17. Proper installation of filters.

18. Filter gauge set to zero.

B. Manufacturer’s service technician shall submit field inspection

report noting any deficiencies and corrective action required.

C. Resolve any non-compliant items prior to unit start-up.




24

3.04 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT: AHU FAN ASSEMBLY

A. Hire the manufacturer’s factory-trained and factory-employed

service technician perform an inspection of the AHU fan

assembly subsequent to general AHU inspection and prior to

startup. Technician shall inspect and verify the following as a

minimum:

1. Fan isolation base and thrust restraint alignment.

2. Tight set screws on pulleys, bearings and fan.

3. Tight fan bearing bolts.

4. Tight fan and motor sheaves.

5. Tight motor base and mounting bolts.

6. Blower wheel tight and aligned to fan shaft.

7. Sheave alignment and belt tension.

8. Fan discharge alignment with discharge opening.

9. Fan bearing lubrication.

10. Free rotation of moving components (rotate manually).

B. Manufacturer’s service technician shall submit field inspection

report noting any deficiencies and corrective action required.

C. Resolve any non-compliant items prior to unit start-up.

3.05 STARTUP SERVICE and OWNER TRAINING

A. Manufacturer’s factory-trained and factory-employed service

technician shall startup AHUs. Technician shall perform the

following steps as a minimum:

1. Energize the unit disconnect switch.

2. Verify correct voltage, phases and cycles.

3. Energize fan motor briefly (“bump”) and verify correct di-

rection of rotation.

4. Re-check damper operation; verify that unit cannot and

will not operate with all dampers in the closed position.

5. Energize fan motors and verify that motor FLA is within

manufacturer’s tolerance of nameplate FLA for each phase.

B. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of training for owner’s personnel

by manufacturer’s factory-trained and factory-employed service

technician. Training shall include AHU controls, motor starter,

VFD, and AHU.

C. Training shall include startup and shutdown procedures as well

as regular operation and maintenance requirements.

D. If AHU is provided with a factory-mounted variable frequency

drive (VFD), hire the VFD manufacturer’s factory-trained and




25

factory-employed service technician to inspect, test, adjust,

program and start the VFD. Ensure that critical resonant

frequencies are programmed as ‘skip frequencies’ in the VFD

controller.

E. Submit a startup report summarizing any problems found and

remedies performed.

3.06 FIELD PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

A. Leakage: Perform leakage testing prior to final supply and

return connections.

B. Install manufacturer supplied blanks on return air opening,

outside air intake opening, relief air opening, and supply air

opening prior to performing test.

C. Pressurize casing to maximum operating static pressure (up to

+/-8” w.g.) and measure leakage. If leakage exceeds 1% of

design airflow, seal leakage points with a permanent solution.

Repeat test. If the AHU still does not pass, contact the

manufacturer to seal unit.

D. Test sections operating under positive pressure with positive

pressure, and sections operating under negative pressure with

negative pressure.

E. Submit a field test report with testing data recorded. Include

description of corrective actions taken.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean unit interior prior to operating. Remove tools, debris,

dust and dirt.

B. Clean exterior prior to transfer to owner.

3.08 DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide Installation Instruction Manual, & Startup checklist in

the supply fan section of each unit.

B. Provide six copies of Spare Parts Manual for owner’s project

system manual.

END OF SECTION




26



FAN COIL UNITS 238219 - 1

SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ducted fan coil units and accessories.





B. Shop Drawings:









A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan coil units to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for

motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.





A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that

are packaged with protective covering for storage and

identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fan Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one set of spare filters

for each unit installed.

2. Fan Belts: Furnish one spare fan belt for each unit

installed.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-

Conditioning."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan coil units and

suspension system components with other construction that

penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light

fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components,

and partition assemblies.

1.9 WARRANTY

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION




B. Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to

AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.

2.2 DUCTED FAN COIL UNITS

A. Fan Coil Unit Configurations:




1. Number of Heating Coils: One with two-pipe system.

B. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2-inch- thick, foil-faced glass

fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive

complying with ASTM C 916.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation and adhesive

shall have a combined maximum flame-spread index of 25

and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency.

2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the

airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Chassis: Galvanized steel.

D. Filters: Minimum arrestance and a minimum efficiency reporting

value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2 and all addendums.

E. MERV Rating: 7 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and

MERV 7.

F. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum

fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum

working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water

temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain.

G. Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal;

with permanently lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently

mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels,

and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

H. Belt-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal;

with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on

an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet.

Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or

galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

1. Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 230513

"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

I. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper

tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label

piping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet.

1. Two-way, two-position control valve for heating coil.




2. Hose Kits: Minimum 400-psig working pressure and

operating temperatures from 33 to 211 deg F. Tag hose

kits to equipment designations.

a. Length: 24 inches.

b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan coil unit connection

size.

3. Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port,

chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-

psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

4. Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball

type; 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum

operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or

venturi, connections for portable differential pressure

meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and a memory

stop to retain set position.

5. Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126,

Class B); 125-psig working pressure; with threaded

connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel

basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum

NPS 1/2 hose-end, full-port, ball-type blowdown valve in

drain connection.

6. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

J. Control devices and operational sequence are specified in

Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC

Equipment” and / or on drawings."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, to receive fan coil

units for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to

verify actual locations before fan coil unit installation.






3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan coil units from structure with elastomeric

hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Section 230548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and

Equipment."

D. Install new filters in each fan coil unit within two weeks

after Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,

fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements

are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and

maintenance.

2. Connect piping to fan coil unit factory hydronic piping

package. Install piping package if shipped loose.

B. Connect supply-air and return-air ducts to fan coil units with

flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct

Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for

duct connections.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and


D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage





1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been

energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation

and unit operation.




2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace

damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as

specified above.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and

maintain fan coil units.




CABINET UNIT HEATERS 238239.13 - 1

SECTION 238239.13 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans

and hot-water heating coils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. DDC: Direct digital control.

C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.





3. Include location and size of each field connection.

4. Include details of anchorages and attachments to

structure and to supported equipment.




5. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities,

operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

6. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and

specialties.

7. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans,

and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input

from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which cabinet unit heaters will be

attached.

3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for

acoustical tile.

5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the

following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

6. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed

cabinets.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to









1. Cabinet Unit-Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s)

for each filter installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with AHRI 440.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and



C. Comply with UL 2021.


A. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-

Conditioning."

2.4 CABINETS

A. Material: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's

standard paint, in color selected by Architect.

1. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0677-inch-

thick galvanized sheet steel, removable panels with

channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam

fasteners.

2. Recessed Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet.

3. Control Access Door: Key operated.

4. Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick steel, finished to match

cabinet, 4 inches high with leveling bolts.




5. Extended Piping Compartment: 9-inch- wide piping end

pocket.

6. False Back: Minimum 0.0428-inch- thick steel, finished to

match cabinet.

2.5 FILTERS

A. Minimum Arrestance: And a minimum efficiency reporting value

(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Expanded aluminum - cleanable: 70 percent arrestance and

MERV 3.

2.6 COILS

A. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum

fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum

working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water

temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain.

2.7 CONTROLS

A. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.

1. Fan: Forward curved, high static, double width,

centrifugal, directly connected to motor; thermoplastic

or painted-steel wheels and aluminum, painted-steel, or

galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently

mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in

Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."

3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with

plug connection.

B. Factory, Hot-Water Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper

tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label

piping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet.

1. Two way, two-position control valve.

2. Hose Kits: Minimum 400-psig working pressure, and

operating temperatures from 33 to 211 deg F. Tag hose

kits to equipment designations.

a. Length: 24 inches.




b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to cabinet unit-heater

connection size.

3. Two-Piece, Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port,

chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-

psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

4. Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball

type, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum

operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or

venture, connection for portable differential pressure

meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and equipped

with a memory stop to retain set position.

5. Y-Pattern, Hot-Water Strainers: Cast-iron body

(ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig minimum working pressure;

with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated

stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

Include minimum NPS 1/2 threaded pipe and full-port ball

valve in strainer drain connection.

6. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

C. Control devices and operational sequences are specified in

Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC"

and Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."

D. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control voltage transformer.

2. Wall-mounted temperature sensor.

3. Unoccupied period override push button.

4. Data entry and access port.

a. Input data includes room temperature and occupied

and unoccupied periods.

b. Output data includes room temperature, supply-air

temperature, entering-water temperature, operating

mode, and status.

E. DDC Terminal Controller:

1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on

seven-day clock with a minimum of four programmable

periods per day.

2. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operations:

a. Occupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain room

temperature.




b. Unoccupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain setback

room temperature.

3. Heating-Coil Operations:

a. Occupied Periods: Open control valve to provide

heating if room temperature falls below thermostat

set point.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Start fan and open control valve

if room temperature falls below setback temperature.

4. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.

F. Interface with DDC System for HVAC Requirements:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.

2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at central

workstation.

3. Interface shall be BAC-net compatible for central DDC

system for HVAC workstation and include the following

functions:

a. Adjust set points.

b. Cabinet unit-heater start, stop, and operating

status.

c. Data inquiry, including supply-air and room-air

temperature.

d. Occupied and unoccupied schedules.

G. Electrical Connection: Factory-wired motors and controls for a

single field connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive cabinet unit heaters for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to

verify actual locations before unit-heater installation.






3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and

weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and applications are

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric

hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Section 230548

"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

D. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in

electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls.

Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control

sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.

E. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of

Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in

Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping," and Section 232116 Hydronic

Piping Specialties". Drawings indicate general arrangement of

piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and

maintenance.

C. Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot-water

piping package. Install the piping package if shipped loose.

D. Connect supply and return ducts to cabinet unit heaters with

flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct

Accessories."

E. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball

valve on supply-water connection and union and calibrated

balancing valve on return-water connection of cabinet unit

heater. Hydronic specialties are specified in Section 232113

"Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping

Specialties."




G. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and


H. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage





1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been

energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation

and unit operation.

2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to

verify proper operation and electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace

damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION



cabinet unit heaters.


FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT THE COLLEGE …

Documents

Transcript of FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT THE COLLEGE …